Panasonic Plumbing Product M1111TY0 FJ User Manual

Operating Instructions  
<Operations and Settings>  
Live Switcher  
Model No.  
AV-HS410N  
How the Operating Instructions are configured  
<Basics>:  
The <Basics> describes the procedure for connection with the required equipment and for installation.  
Before installing this unit, be sure to take the time to read through <Basics> to ensure that the unit will  
be installed correctly.  
<Operations and Settings> (this manual):  
This <Operations and Settings> describes how to operate the unit and how to establish its settings.  
“2-2. Basic menu operations”  
For details on how to perform the basic menu operations, refer to  
in the <Basics>.  
ENGLISH  
M1111TY0 -FJ  
VQT3U71A(E)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
1-5. DSK (downstream key).......................................... 35  
1-5-1. Selecting the DSK type .................................... 35  
1-5-2. Selecting the DSK material.............................. 36  
1-5-3. DSK transitions ................................................ 36  
1-5-4. DSK preview..................................................... 37  
1-5-5. DSK adjustments ............................................. 37  
1-5-6. DSK decorations .............................................. 38  
1-5-7. Masking the DSK signals ................................. 39  
Before use.................................................... 5  
Overview........................................................................... 5  
Concerning the ratings display ...................................... 5  
Disclaimer of warranty .................................................... 5  
Network security.............................................................. 5  
Concerning differences in the system versions ........... 6  
1. Basic operations ..................................... 7  
1-6. Key Link .................................................................. 40  
1-7. FTB (Fade to Black) ............................................... 41  
1-1. Background transition............................................. 7  
1-1-1. Selecting the bus................................................ 7  
1-1-2. Selecting the bus using the SHIFT function....... 7  
1-1-3. Selecting the bus mode...................................... 8  
1-1-4. Selecting the transition mode............................. 8  
1-1-5. Manual transition................................................ 9  
1-1-6. Auto transition .................................................... 9  
1-1-7. Cut transition...................................................... 9  
1-8. Internal color signals............................................. 42  
1-8-1. Setting the color background ........................... 42  
1-8-2. Setting the Wash effect .................................... 42  
1-9. Switching the AUX output..................................... 44  
1-9-1. Selecting the AUX output materials ................. 44  
1-9-2. AUX1 transitions............................................... 44  
1-2. Wipe ........................................................................ 10  
1-2-1. Selecting the wipe pattern................................ 10  
1-2-2. Selecting the wipe direction ............................. 11  
1-2-3. Wipe decorations (border, soft effect) .............. 11  
1-2-4. Setting the wipe start position.......................... 12  
1-2-5. Modifying wipe ................................................. 12  
1-2-6. Setting the latency............................................ 14  
1-9-3. Setting enable/disable for the AUX1  
transition........................................................... 45  
1-10. Memory ................................................................... 46  
1-10-1. Memory registration and recall items............... 47  
1-10-2. Storing the settings in the memory (Store) ...... 47  
1-10-3. Recalling the operations stored in the memory  
(Recall)............................................................. 48  
1-3. Key........................................................................... 15  
1-3-1. Selecting the key type...................................... 15  
1-3-2. Selecting the key material................................ 16  
1-3-3. Key transitions.................................................. 17  
1-3-4. Key preview...................................................... 19  
1-3-5. Adjusting the luminance key and linear key ..... 19  
1-3-6. Adjusting the chroma key................................. 20  
1-3-7. Key decorations................................................ 26  
1-3-8. Masking the key signals................................... 27  
1-3-9. Flying key......................................................... 28  
1-3-10. Setting the priority............................................ 28  
1-10-4. Memory preview............................................... 49  
1-10-5. Deleting the operations stored in the memory  
(Delete) ............................................................ 50  
1-10-6. Selecting the buses whose settings are to be  
registered and or played back.......................... 51  
1-10-7. Registering the material selection items .......... 52  
1-10-8. Setting effect dissolve  
(shot memory).................................................. 52  
1-10-9. Editing event memory timelines ....................... 53  
1-10-10. Registering memories (Register) ..................... 59  
1-11. Video memories ..................................................... 60  
1-11-1. Recording still images (Still)............................. 61  
1-11-2. Recording moving images (Clip)...................... 62  
1-11-3. Saving Images in Flash Memory...................... 63  
1-11-4. Playing back moving images (Clip) .................. 64  
1-4. PinP (picture in picture)......................................... 29  
1-4-1. Selecting the PinP channel and material ......... 29  
1-4-2. Transition between PinP materials................... 29  
1-4-3. Selecting Shape............................................... 30  
1-4-4. PinP preview .................................................... 30  
1-4-5. PinP transitions ................................................ 30  
1-4-6. PinP adjustments ............................................. 31  
1-4-7. Linking PinP1 and PinP2.................................. 32  
1-4-8. PinP decorations.............................................. 33  
1-4-9. Trimming settings ............................................. 34  
1-12. Memory card........................................................... 67  
1-12-1. Initializing the memory cards ........................... 69  
1-12-2. Saving data on memory cards ......................... 69  
1-12-3. Loading data from memory cards .................... 70  
1-12-4. Deleting files on memory cards........................ 71  
1-12-5. Displaying the memory card information.......... 71  
1-13. Waveform monitor settings................................... 72  
1-14. Setting the status display...................................... 73  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
2. Input/output signal settings................. 74 3. System settings................................... 102  
2-1. Input signal settings.............................................. 74  
2-1-1. Setting the frame synchronizer ........................ 76  
2-1-2. Setting the input mode ..................................... 77  
2-1-3. Setting the delay amount ................................. 78  
2-1-4. Freezing the input signals ................................ 78  
2-1-5. Setting the material names .............................. 78  
2-1-6. Setting the up-converter................................... 79  
2-1-7. Setting the video process function ................... 80  
2-1-8. Setting the analog input gain (option) .............. 80  
3-1. Setting the system format................................... 102  
3-2. Setting the crosspoints ....................................... 103  
3-2-1. Assigning signals to the crosspoints .............. 103  
3-2-2. Setting the crosspoint switching..................... 104  
3-3. Button assignments............................................. 105  
3-3-1. Setting the user buttons ................................. 105  
3-4. Setting the date and time .................................... 106  
3-5. Network settings .................................................. 106  
2-1-9. Setting the analog composite input signals  
(option)............................................................. 81  
3-6. Setting the built-in display backlight and  
2-1-10. Setting the DVI input signals ............................ 82  
2-1-11. Displaying the DVI input signal information...... 86  
2-1-12. Adjusting the DVI input signals......................... 87  
button illumination............................................... 107  
3-7. Status displays..................................................... 108  
3-7-1. Alarm status displays ..................................... 108  
3-7-2. Alarm message.............................................. 108  
2-1-13. Automatic adjustment of the black level and  
white level (analog input signals) ..................... 87  
3-7-3. Displaying the version information and  
option information........................................... 109  
2-2. Output signal settings........................................... 88  
2-2-1. Assigning the output signals ............................ 89  
2-2-2. Setting the SDI output color range................... 89  
2-2-3. Setting the DVI output signals.......................... 90  
2-2-4. Setting the down-converter (option)................. 92  
3-8. Initialization .......................................................... 110  
3-8-1. Initializing setting data.................................... 110  
3-8-2. Initializing fader .............................................. 110  
4. External interfaces.............................. 111  
4-1. Setting the GPI I/O ............................................... 111  
4-2. LAN........................................................................ 115  
4-3. EDITOR.................................................................. 115  
4-4. COM....................................................................... 115  
4-5. Plug-in software................................................... 116  
2-3. Setting the sync signals........................................ 93  
2-4. Adjusting the output signal phase....................... 93  
2-5. Setting the multi view display............................... 97  
2-5-1. Setting the screen layout.................................. 97  
2-5-2. Setting the split frame and characters.............. 98  
2-5-3. Setting the tally displays................................... 98  
2-5-4. Changing the material names.......................... 99  
2-5-5. Setting the level meters.................................. 100  
2-5-6. Setting the input signal marks........................ 100  
2-5-7. Setting the markers........................................ 100  
2-5-8. High-resolution multi view mode .................... 100  
5. Setting menu table .............................. 117  
Appendix (glossary)................................ 139  
Index ......................................................... 142  
2-6. Setting the ancillary data and embedded  
audio data............................................................. 101  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before use  
Overview  
Network security  
The unit also has functions which are used when it is  
connected to a network. Using the unit when it has been  
connected to a network may possibly give rise to the following  
issues.  
This unit is a 1 ME digital video switcher which supports a  
multiple number of HD and SD formats.  
Despite its compact size, it comes with eight SDI inputs, one  
DVI-D input, five SDI outputs and one DVI-D output.  
The unit comes with a luminance key and chroma keys  
provided as keyers in addition to the background transitions  
based on the cut, mix and wipe functions.  
It also has one DSK line and two PinP lines for enabling video  
recording, playback and a host of other video production  
functions.  
Leakage or theft of information through this unit  
Use of this unit for illegal operations by persons with  
malicious intent  
Interference with or stoppage of this unit by persons  
with malicious intent  
Furthermore, using the multi view display settings, the  
screen of a monitor can be split into a number of sections to  
accommodate up to sixteen images, enabling the number  
of monitors to be reduced and a space-saving system to be  
configured at low cost.  
It is your responsibility to take precautions such as those  
described below to protect yourself against the above network  
security risks.  
 Use this unit in a network secured by a firewall, etc.  
 If this unit is connected to a network that includes  
computers, make sure that the system is not infected  
by computer viruses or other malicious entities (using  
a regularly updated antivirus program, anti-spyware  
program, etc.).  
Concerning the ratings display  
The unit’s name, model number and electrical ratings are  
indicated on its side panel.  
The following points should be borne in mind as well.  
 Use with the same segment is recommended for the  
equipment which is connected to the unit.  
Disclaimer of warranty  
If the unit is connected to equipment whose segments  
are different, events dependent upon the settings inherent  
to the network equipment, for instance, may occur so  
thoroughly check the connections with the equipment  
to which the unit will be connected prior to the start of  
operation.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL Panasonic Corporation BE LIABLE  
TO ANY PARTY OR ANY PERSON, EXCEPT FOR  
REPLACEMENT OR REASONABLE MAINTENANCE OF  
THE PRODUCT, FOR THE CASES, INCLUDING BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO BELOW:  
 Do not choose an installation location where the unit,  
cables and other parts will be easily damaged.  
ANY DAMAGE AND LOSS, INCLUDING WITHOUT  
LIMITATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,  
CONSEQUENTIAL OR EXEMPLARY, ARISING OUT  
OF OR RELATING TO THE PRODUCT;  
PERSONAL INJURY OR ANY DAMAGE CAUSED BY  
INAPPROPRIATE USE OR NEGLIGENT OPERATION  
OF THE USER;  
UNAUTHORIZED DISASSEMBLE, REPAIR OR  
MODIFICATION OF THE PRODUCT BY THE USER;  
INCONVENIENCE OR ANY LOSS ARISING WHEN  
IMAGES ARE NOT DISPLAYED, DUE TO ANY  
REASON OR CAUSE INCLUDING ANY FAILURE OR  
PROBLEM OF THE PRODUCT;  
ANY PROBLEM, CONSEQUENTIAL INCONVENIENCE,  
OR LOSS OR DAMAGE, ARISING OUT OF THE  
SYSTEM COMBINED BY THE DEVICES OF THIRD  
PARTY;  
ANY INCONVENIENCE, DAMAGES OR LOSSES  
RESULTING FROM ACCIDENTS CAUSED BY  
AN INADEQUATE INSTALLATION METHOD OR  
ANY FACTORS OTHER THAN A DEFECT IN THE  
PRODUCT ITSELF;  
LOSS OF REGISTERED DATA CAUSED BY ANY  
FAILURE;  
ANY DAMAGE OR CLAIMS DUE TO LOSS OR  
LEAKAGE OF IMAGE DATA OR SETTING DATA  
SAVED ON THIS UNIT OR ON A MEMORY CARD OR  
COMPUTER.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Before use  
Concerning differences in the system versions  
This manual describes the functions which can be actuated in any model whose system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
The applicable functions are referred to as “This function can be actuated in any model whose system version is V2.00.00  
and up”.  
If the model has a system version below V2.00.00, the functions concerned cannot be used.  
Neither will the menus and menu items concerned be displayed.  
How to check the system version  
To check the system version of this unit, select System menu Main Version sub menu System Version item, and check  
the display for this item.  
Refer to “3-7-3. Displaying the version information and option information”.  
Restrictions on menus and functions  
[Restrictions on menus]  
Model with system  
Menu  
Sub menu  
Clip1 Play  
Item  
Reverse  
version V2.00.00  
and up  
Model with system version below V2.00.00  
Mode  
Variable  
Reverse  
Variable  
All items  
All items  
Clip2 Play  
Mode  
Video Memory  
Trans Sync  
Memory  
: Valid  
—: Invalid  
[Restrictions on functions]  
Function  
Model with system  
version V2.00.00  
and up  
Model with system version below V2.00.00  
Still image (Still)  
Status display  
Moving image (Clip)  
Memory card  
Only a list of the names is displayed.  
The images in the video  
memory are saved in the  
flash memory area.  
The images in the video memory cannot be saved  
automatically.  
Save the images manually on the memory card.  
Video memory  
saving  
Moving image (Clip)  
operations are performed  
using the number keys.  
Moving image (Clip) cannot be operated using the  
number keys.  
Operate them using the menu.  
Moving image (Clip)  
playback  
: Valid  
—: Invalid  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-1. Background transition  
1-1-1. Selecting the bus  
Press one of the crosspoint buttons to select the material to  
be used for the background transition.  
Depending on the operating status, the button pressed will  
light in one of two colors.  
1-1-2. Selecting the bus using the SHIFT  
function  
The SHIFT function enables two materials to be allocated —  
the front material and the rear material — to one button, and  
the materials to be selected using the [SHIFT] button.  
A total of 24 materials — front materials (1 to 12) and rear  
materials (13 to 24) — can be allocated to the three groups of  
12 crosspoint buttons whether these buttons are the PGM/A  
bus crosspoint buttons, PST/B bus crosspoint buttons or AUX  
bus crosspoint buttons.  
Lighting in  
red  
When the selected input signals are output to  
PGM.  
(However, the indicator lights in amber during  
FTB operations.)  
Lighting in  
green  
When the selected input signals are not output  
to PGM.  
There are actually two SHIFT functions: “All SHIFT” for  
switching all the front materials to the rear materials or vice  
versa, and “Single SHIFT” for switching the front material of  
one crosspoint button with its rear material or vice versa.  
“All SHIFT” works once the SHIFT function has been  
allocated to one of the user buttons.  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
ヱヨヮ  
ヴラリョヵ  
ヒビバビフ  
ヒバヒピ  
ビバヒフ  
ピバヒブ  
フバヒプ  
ブバヒヘ  
プバヒベ  
ヘバヒペ  
ベバビパ  
ペバビヒ  
ヒパバビビ  
ヒヒバビピ  
“Single SHIFT” works once the SHIFT function has been  
allocated to the No.12 or No.1 crosspoint button of the  
crosspoint button group concerned by a menu operation.  
ヱヴヵ  
ヴラリョヵ  
Lighting in red  
Lighting in green  
All SHIFT  
 When the crosspoint buttons are held down, the button  
numbers and the names of the input materials assigned to  
the buttons are displayed on the built-in display in the form  
of a list for as long as the crosspoint buttons remain held  
down.  
All SHIFT is used to switch all the materials of the PGM/A bus  
crosspoint buttons, PST/B bus crosspoint buttons or AUX bus  
crosspoint buttons from front materials to rear materials or  
vice versa.  
The user button to which the SHIFT function has been  
allocated is used to switch between the front materials and  
rear materials.  
CROSS POINT ASSIGN  
XPT:  
SIG:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
Allocate the SHIFT function to one of the user buttons.  
(For the method used to allocate this function to the  
user button, refer to “3-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.)  
BLK  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
IN6  
IN7  
IN8  
DVI  
A1  
SHIFT  
XPT:  
SIG:  
13  
14  
B1  
15  
B2  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
A2  
CBAR CBD1 ST1V None None KOUT CLN None SHIFT  
Each time the [SHIFT] button (user button) is pressed,  
the front materials are switched to the rear materials or  
vice versa.  
When the rear materials (13 to 24) have been selected,  
the [SHIFT] button (user button) lights in amber.  
When the button is pressed again, it goes off, and the  
front materials (1 to 12) are now selected.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Single SHIFT  
1-1-3. Selecting the bus mode  
Select the A/B bus system or flip-flop system (PGM/PST  
system) from the setting menu.  
Single SHIFT is used to switch the individual material of a  
PGM/A bus crosspoint button, PST/B bus crosspoint button  
or AUX bus crosspoint button from a front material to a rear  
material or vice versa.  
Switching between the front material and rear material is  
done using the crosspoint button in which the SHIFT function  
is allocated.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Operate sub menu.  
The SHIFT function can be allocated to button No.1 or No.12.  
Allocating the SHIFT function  
Press the x button to light its indicator, and display the  
Use [F2], and select the A/B or PGM/PST (flip-flop  
XPT menu.  
system) using the Bus Mode item.  
A/B  
When the fader lever is at side A, the signals  
selected by the A bus are replaced PGM  
materials.  
Use [F1] to display the XPT Setting sub menu.  
When the fader lever is at side B, the signals  
selected by the B bus are replaced PGM  
materials.  
Use [F2] to select the button to which the SHIFT  
PGM-A/  
PST-B  
Using a flip-flop system, the signals selected  
by the A bus are always replaced PGM  
materials, and the signals selected by the  
B bus are always replaced PST materials.  
function is to be allocated using the Shift item.  
Right  
Left  
Off  
Button No.12  
Button No.1  
PGM-B/  
PST-A  
Using a flip-flop system, the signals selected  
by the B bus are always replaced PGM  
materials, and the signals selected by the  
A bus are always replaced PST materials.  
Function is not allocated.  
Use [F3] to select the operation to be performed when  
the [SHIFT] button is pressed using the Shift-Lock item.  
Off  
The rear material is selected only while the  
[SHIFT] button is pressed.  
1-1-4. Selecting the transition mode  
Select the transition mode using the MIX and WIPE buttons.  
On  
The front material and rear material are  
switched each time the [SHIFT] button is  
pressed.  
Press the [BKGD] button in the transition area so that its  
indicator lights in amber.  
To use the materials that have been set in the button  
to which the SHIFT function is allocated, either set the  
SHIFT function off or allocate the SHIFT function to  
another button.  
When the [BKGD] button and [KEY] button are pressed  
at the same time, both buttons are selected.  
Use the [MIX] and [WIPE] buttons in the transition area  
to select the background transition mode.  
If a rear material has been selected regardless of  
whether the Shift-Lock item is On or Off, both the button  
concerned and the [SHIFT] button will light in amber.  
When PGM/PST is selected as the bus mode setting  
or when the bus has been switched by a transition, the  
SHIFT status will also be switched.  
The indicator of the selected button lights in amber.  
If the [SHIFT] button for “Single SHIFT” is pressed when  
the rear materials (13 to 24) have been selected using  
“All SHIFT”, the bus crosspoint buttons concerned will be  
switched to the front materials.  
When the crosspoint buttons are held down, the button  
numbers and the names of the input materials assigned  
to the buttons are displayed on the built-in display in the  
form of a list for as long as the crosspoint buttons remain  
held down.  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-1-5. Manual transition  
1-1-7. Cut transition  
Operate the fader lever to execute transitions manually.  
If the fader lever has been operated during auto transition,  
auto transition will be switched to manual operation as soon  
as the fader position overtakes the amount of the transition  
being executed.  
When the [CUT] button is pressed, the transition is executed  
instantly.  
The bus tally LEDs on the left of the fader lever indicate the  
program bus output status.  
Top LED only lights PGM/A bus output  
Top and bottom  
LEDs light  
During the transition  
Bottom LED only  
lights  
PST/B bus output  
1-1-6. Auto transition  
 When the [AUTO] button is pressed, the transition is  
executed automatically using the transition time which has  
been set.  
 The transition is executed in the remaining time when the  
[AUTO] button is pressed while the fader lever is being  
operated.  
 The auto transition time is set using the Time menu.  
Press the t button to light its indicator, and display the  
Time menu.  
Use [F1] to display the BKGD sub menu.  
Set the transition time.  
When setting the transition time in frame units  
Use [F4] to set the transition time in frames.  
When setting the transition time in second units  
Use [F3] to set the time in seconds and [F4] to set it  
in frames.  
The display unit is set by selecting Config menu   
Operate sub menu Time Unit item.  
Sec  
The time is displayed as a number of  
seconds.  
Frame  
The time is displayed as a number of frames.  
Any time from 0 to 999f can be set. The time which can  
be set when seconds are used as the display unit differs  
depending on the system format.  
59.94i:  
50i:  
max. 33s09f  
max. 39s24f  
max. 41s15f  
59.94p:  
50p:  
max. 16s39f  
max. 19s49f  
max. 41s15f  
24PsF:  
23.98PsF:  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-2. Wipe  
1-2-1. Selecting the wipe pattern  
The wipe patterns are selected using the number keys.  
Press the [BKGD PATT] button (or [KEY PATT] button).  
The [BKGD PATT] button (or [KEY PATT] button)  
indicator lights in amber, and the pattern table screen  
appears on the built-in display.  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
バ  
ヷヮユヮ  
Use [F1] to select the page.  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
Use one of the number keys to select the pattern.  
The corresponding button lights in amber, and the  
pattern is switched.  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ユワヵユン  
ンユヷ  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
パバヒパ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
Use [F5] to close the table screen.  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
The table screen can also be closed by pressing the  
[BKGD PATT] button or [KEY PATT] button and turning  
off the button’s indicator.  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
Table of wipe patterns  
 The “SQ2: 8” pattern takes effect when the [KEY PATT] button has been pressed.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-2-3. Wipe decorations (border, soft  
effect)  
A border effect or soft effect can be added to the wiping of  
background transitions.  
1-2-2. Selecting the wipe direction  
Operate the wipe direction selector buttons to select the wipe  
direction for the background transition.  
(The key transitions are set by the menu. The direction which  
is set here will not be reflected.)  
See “1-3-3. Key transitions”.  
Setting the border and soft effect  
A
N
R
N/R  
A
Press the b button to light its indicator, and display the  
Background menu.  
A
B
A
B
A
A
B
B
A
Use [F1] to display the Border sub menu.  
B
B
A
B
B
Use [F2] to set On (or Off) for the border using the  
Border item.  
When the [R] indicator is off:  
Use [F3] to set the width of the border using the Width  
Wiping proceeds in the normal direction.  
item.  
When the [R] indicator is lit:  
Wiping proceeds in the reverse direction.  
Use [F4] to set the amount of soft effect using the Soft  
item.  
When the [N/R] indicator is lit:  
The normal direction is replaced with the reverse  
direction (or vice versa) when the transition is  
completed.  
(The lit and extinguished statuses of the [R] button are  
also switched in line with the direction of the wiping.)  
When “On” has been selected as the Border item  
setting, the ratio of the soft effect to the border width is  
indicated as the amount of soft effect.  
When only the soft effect is to be added to wipe, select  
“Off” as the Border item setting.  
Setting the border color  
On the Background menu, use [F1] to display the  
Border Color sub menu.  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum  
of the border color.  
To call the preset color  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-2-5. Modifying wipe  
1-2-4. Setting the wipe start position  
Wipe start can be set at any desired position.  
Setting the 3D (page turning) effect  
Target patterns:  
WIPE1: 5  
WIPE2: 4, 5, 6, 7  
A lighting effect can be added to a wipe pattern.  
Alternatively, the page turning effect parameter can be set.  
These effects can be set for background transitions and key  
transitions.  
SQ1:  
SQ2:  
5
4, 5, 6, 7  
Target patterns:  
3D1: 1, 3, 7, 9  
The WIPE pattern is set using the WIPE Position sub menu of  
the Background menu (or Key menu).  
In the same way, the SQ pattern is set using the SQ Position  
sub menu of the Background menu (or Key menu).  
Press the b button (or k button) to light its indicator,  
and display the Background menu (or Key menu).  
Press the b button (or k button) to light its indicator,  
and display the Background menu (or Key menu).  
Use [F1] to display the 3D Modify sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the WIPE Position sub menu (or SQ  
Position sub menu).  
Use [F2] to select whether the lighting effect is to be  
added using the Light item.  
On  
Off  
The lighting effect is added.  
Either operate the positioners or use [F2] and [F3] to set  
the wipe start position using the X-Pos item and Y-Pos  
item.  
The lighting effect is not added.  
This setting is possible only if the target pattern has  
been selected for the background or key pattern.  
Use [F3] to set the size when images have been  
reduced using the Size item.  
Either operate the fader lever or press the [AUTO]  
button to check the wipe operation.  
Use [F4] to set the radius of the page turning effect  
using the Radius item.  
(When, for instance, –50 has been set for X-Pos and  
–50 for Y-Pos, the following screen (or key) appears  
from the bottom left and wipe is performed while the  
screen (or key) moves to the screen center.)  
Use [F5] to set the direction of the page turning effect  
using the Angle item.  
<X-Pos,Y-Pos setting range>  
Inside screen area  
Outside screen area  
To copy the start position setting, press [F5] (Copy to  
Key or Copy to BKGD).  
The background setting is copied to the key setting  
while the key setting is copied to the background setting.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Setting the trimming  
The trimming at the time a background transition is executed  
can be set.  
Target patterns:  
SQ1, SQ2, SL, 3D1, 3D2  
The “4:3” and “4:3Smth” settings for the Trim item take effect  
when the HD format has been selected as the system format  
setting.  
On the Background menu, use [F1] to display the Modify  
sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the trimming operation and transition  
operation using the Trim item.  
16:9 (On)  
For trimming the edges around the material.  
This setting is used when a black border, for  
instance, can be seen around the material.  
When HD has been selected as the system  
format setting, “16:9” is displayed on the  
menu, but when SD has been selected as the  
system format setting, “On” is displayed on  
the menu.  
4:3  
For trimming using the 4:3 aspect ratio and  
releasing the trimming when the transition is  
completed.  
4:3Smth  
Off  
For trimming using the 4:3 aspect ratio and  
executing the transition to 16:9 images  
smoothly.  
No trimming  
Use [F3] to select the setting for automatic trimming (4:3  
or 4:3Smth) in accordance with the material using the  
4:3 Auto item.  
Off  
All input materials are targeted for automatic  
trimming.  
On  
Using the up-converter setting, the input  
materials for which “Edge Crop” is selected  
are targeted for automatic trimming.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-2-6. Setting the latency  
A delay amount can be set for the background image or key  
image.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Latency sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the delay amount for the background  
image using the BKGD item.  
Alternatively, use [F3] to set the delay amount for the  
key image using the Key item.  
1F Fix  
The image is delayed by one frame (1F).  
There will be no original image remaining  
when wipe is completed (when SQ1, SQ2,  
SL, 3D1 or 3D2 has been selected as the  
wipe pattern).  
Minimum  
The image is not delayed.  
However, the image will be delayed by one  
frame (1F) when SQ1, SQ2, SL, 3D1 or  
3D2 has been selected as the wipe pattern  
or when the flying key has been selected.  
BKGD items  
Delay amount At times other than  
MIX/WIPE  
SQ/SL/3D  
setting  
during transitions  
Minimum  
No delay  
No delay  
1F delay  
1F delay  
1F delay  
1F Fix  
1F delay  
Key items  
Delay amount At times other than  
SQ/SL/3D/  
Flying key  
MIX/WIPE  
setting  
Minimum  
1F Fix  
during transitions  
No delay  
No delay  
1F delay  
1F delay  
1F delay  
1F delay  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-3-1. Selecting the key type  
1-3. Key  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
This operation combines the background image with another  
image. The key definition can be adjusted, and an edge can  
be added to the combined image.  
Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Key sub menu.  
Also available as materials besides KEY for combining with  
the background image are PinP (picture in picture) and DSK  
(downstream key).  
The default settings for priority (image positioning) are as  
shown in the figure below.  
Use [F2] to select the Type item.  
Lum  
This is for creating the key signals from  
(luminance key/ the luminance component or luminance  
<Priority default settings>  
Background image  
self key)  
and chroma component of the key fill  
signal.  
Linear  
(linear key/  
EXT key)  
This is for creating the key signals from  
the luminance component of the key  
source signal.  
Key  
It is used when the key source signal and  
key fill signal are different.  
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK  
Chroma  
(chroma key/  
self key)  
This is for creating the key signals using  
a specific hue of the key fill signal as the  
reference.  
Full  
This is for creating the key signals using  
(full key/self key) the images on the full screen as the key  
source signals.  
PinP combinations are possible in  
conjunction with the flying key.  
See “1-3-9. Flying key”.  
The priority for Key, PinP1 and PinP2 can be changed.  
Refer to “1-3-10. Setting the priority”.  
Since the luminance and chroma keys are operated as  
self keys, the key fill signals are used as the key source  
signals. For the full key, the images on the full screen  
are used as the key source signals.  
When the luminance key, chroma key or full key has  
been selected as the key type, the key signals will  
remain unchanged even when the key source signals  
are switched.  
How key combinations work is shown in the figure below.  
<How key composition works>  
Background  
HS410  
When using the linear key, use material with a black  
background and white characters or shape to be  
combined by the key as the key source signal.  
Material which is not black and white may not be  
combined clearly.  
Material with a white background and black characters,  
etc. can be reversed using the key invert function for  
use.  
Output image  
Invert  
Key source  
HS410  
Key fill  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
When the luminance key has been selected, the chroma  
component can be included in the generation of the key  
signals in view of the self key application. (This does not  
apply to the linear key.)  
1-3-2. Selecting the key material  
Selecting the key fill and key source signals  
Use [F3], and select the setting using the Lum Key item.  
Press the [KEY] button in the AUX bus selection area, and  
switch the selection of the key fill signal (indicator lights in  
amber) and key source signal (indicator lights in green).  
Chroma On  
In addition to the luminance component, the  
chroma component is also taken into account  
in the generation of the key signals.  
This is the setting for using a color with a low  
luminance component for the key signals  
(such as when defining blue characters).  
<Selecting the key fill signal>  
With the indicator of the [KEY] button lit in amber, press  
one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the  
key fill signal.  
The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button  
lights in amber. (It will light in red if the selected signal is  
being output from the PGM connector.)  
Chroma Off  
The key signals are generated from only the  
luminance component.  
Use [F4] to select the fill type using the Fill item.  
Bus  
The bus signal is used for the key fill signal.  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
Matte  
The internal fill matte is used for the key fill  
signal.  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
Lighting in amber  
<Selecting the key source signal>  
With the indicator of the [KEY] button lit in green, press  
one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the  
key source signal.  
The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button  
lights in green. (It will light in red if the selected signal is  
being output from the PGM connector.)  
Since the luminance and chroma keys are operated as self  
keys, the key fill signals are used as the key source signals.  
When the luminance key or chroma key has been selected  
as the key type, the key signals will remain unchanged  
even when the key source signals are switched.  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
Lighting in green  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Setting the fill matte color  
1-3-3. Key transitions  
Select the transition mode.  
Press the [KEY] button in the transition area to light its  
indicator.  
To execute a background transition and key transition  
at the same time, press the [BKGD] button and [KEY]  
button together to turn on both indicators.  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Fill Matte sub menu.  
ワバン  
ヸリヱユチュリンユヤヵリヰワ  
レユヺ  
ヰワ  
ョヵャ  
ヰワ  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum  
ャレヨュ  
レユヺ  
ヮリヹ  
ヮリヹ  
of the fill matte.  
ヸリヱユ  
ヸリヱユ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヰワ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ヰワ  
ヮリヹ  
ヸリヱユ  
To call the preset color  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
ュヴレ  
ヰワ  
ヤヶヵ  
モヶヵヰ  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
Select the transition type.  
Use the [MIX] button or [WIPE] button in the transition  
area to select the key transition mode.  
The selected button lights in amber, and the MIX or  
WIPE status indicator LED depending on the selected  
mode lights.  
If WIPE has been selected, press the [KEY PATT] button  
in the memory/wipe pattern/number key area to light its  
indicator, and select the wipe pattern.  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
 
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ンユヷ  
ユワヵユン  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
パバヒパ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
Set the time of the transition.  
On the Time menu, use [F1] to display the Key sub  
menu.  
As with a background transition, set the transition time.  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Set the wipe direction.  
On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Transition sub menu.  
Use [F1] to set “Normal” or “Reverse” using the Keyout Pattern item.  
Normal  
The key out pattern moves in the same direction as the key in pattern.  
The key out pattern moves in the opposite direction from the key in pattern.  
Reverse  
<Pattern examples>  
Pattern example 4  
SQ1: 5  
SQ2: 1, 2, 4 to 7  
3D1: 5  
Pattern example 3  
WIPE1: 5  
WIPE2: 1 to 7  
Pattern example 1  
Pattern example 2  
3D2: 1 to 3  
Key in  
SQ  
SQ  
SQ  
SQ  
SQ  
Key out  
(Normal)  
Key out  
(Reverse)  
SQ  
: This indicates the areas where keys are combined.  
The operations for pattern example 3 are performed for the “WIPE1: 5” and “WIPE2: 1 to 7” patterns.  
The operations for pattern example 4 are performed for the “SQ1: 5”, “SQ2: 1, 2, 4 to 7”, “3D1: 5” and “3D2: 1 to 3”  
patterns. The same operations are performed for normal and reverse.  
Execute the transition.  
Press the [AUTO] button in the transition area to automatically execute the transition at the transition time that has been  
set.  
Alternatively, execute the transition manually by operating the fader lever.  
Key auto transition  
When the [KEY ON] button in the transition area is pressed, the transition is automatically executed at the transition time that  
has been set.  
During key in, the indicator of the [KEY ON] button blinks in red, and it lights in red when the transition is completed.  
If the [KEY ON] button is pressed with the picture completely keyed in, the Key image transition (key out) is executed.  
During key out, the indicator of the [KEY ON] button lights in red, and it goes off when the transition is completed.  
If the [KEY ON] button is pressed during the transition, the transition direction is reversed.  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-3-4. Key preview  
Key preview images can be output to the preview output, and  
the keys can be adjusted and checked.  
1-3-5. Adjusting the luminance key and  
linear key  
These steps are taken to adjust the luminance key and linear  
key definition.  
On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Key sub menu.  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.  
Use [F5] to set the preview mode using the PVW item.  
On  
An image with key effects added is output to  
the preview output.  
Off  
An image with no key effects added is output  
to the preview output.  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the key definition.  
Auto  
The preview image of the next transition is  
output to the preview output.  
Use [F5] to set key invert.  
When “On” is selected, the key signals to be generated  
internally are inverted.  
When a user button to which the On/Off settings have been  
allocated is pressed, the setting is switched alternately  
between On (button indicator lights) and Off (button indicator  
extinguished), and the “Auto” setting is not selected.  
Operation/  
Parameter  
Description of setting  
Setting range  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
On, Off  
F2/  
Clip  
Reference level for generating  
key signals  
F3/  
Gain  
Menu  
On  
User button  
Lights  
When the user button is pressed  
Off: Extinguished  
On: Lights  
Key amplitude  
Key density  
F4/  
Density  
Off  
Extinguished  
Extinguished  
Auto  
On: Lights  
F5/  
Invert  
Key signal inversion  
When “Auto” is selected using a menu operation, the user  
button indicator is turned off (extinguished).  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
To execute the sampling manually  
1-3-6. Adjusting the chroma key  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Sampling is executed for the selected key materials to adjust  
those aspects of the key that are to be compensated.  
Chroma Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Sample sub menu.  
Step 1  
To execute the sampling automatically  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Use [F2] to select “Composite” (composite image that  
combines the background image and key) using the  
View item.  
Chroma Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Auto Compute sub menu.  
Use [F3] to select “Select BG Color” using the Mode  
item.  
Select BG  
Color  
A color for the background of the foreground  
image is specified.  
Normally, either a blue or green background  
is specified.  
Press [F2] to execute the sampling automatically.  
To undo what has been sampled, press [F5].  
Use the positioner to move the position of the sample  
marker.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary  
encoder [Z].  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable,  
press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The area that has been set is now sampled.  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has  
been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one  
only.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Step 2  
Step 3  
The objective of this step is to remove the noise in the  
background image.  
The objective of this step is to remove the noise in the  
foreground image.  
The noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.  
The noise is removed by carrying out this step several times.  
On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the  
Use [F2] to select “Matte” (Matte image) using the View  
Sample sub menu.  
item.  
Use [F2] to select “Matte” (Matte image) using the View  
Use [F3] to select “Clean FG Noise” using the Mode  
item.  
item.  
Clean FG  
Noise  
The noise in the foreground image is  
removed.  
Use [F3] to select “Clean BG Noise” using the Mode  
item.  
Clean BG  
Noise  
The noise in the background image is  
removed.  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample  
marker to the position of the noise (black dots) in the  
foreground image.  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample  
marker to the position of the noise (white dots) in the  
background image.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary  
encoder [Z].  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary  
encoder [Z].  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable,  
press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The noise in the area that has been set is now removed.  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable,  
press the rotary encoder [Z].  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has  
been executed, press [F5].  
The noise in the area that has been set is now removed.  
The number of operations that can be undone is one  
only.  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has  
been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one  
only.  
Before the noise is  
removed  
After the noise is  
removed  
Before the noise is  
removed  
After the noise is  
removed  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Step 4  
Step 5  
After steps 1 to 3 have been carried out, noise will still remain  
in the detail areas such as the subject’s hair as shown in the  
image below.  
The objective of this step is to finely adjust the image by  
adjusting the noise and transparency, for example.  
Noise remaining in the detail areas is also removed in  
“step 4”.  
On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the  
Sample sub menu.  
If there are many areas with noise, the noise is removed by  
carrying out this step several times.  
If there are few areas with noise, adjust the noise using the  
Mode item (“Spill+” and “Spill–”) of the Sample sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the image to be adjusted using the  
View item.  
Composite  
Composite image that combines the  
background image and key  
Matte  
Proc.FG  
FG  
Matte image  
Process foreground image  
Foreground image  
Use [F3] to select the adjustment function using the  
Mode item.  
For details on the items, refer to the following pages.  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample  
marker to the position to be sampled.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary  
encoder [Z].  
Use [F2] to select “Composite” (composite image that  
combines the background image and key) using the  
View item.  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable,  
press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The area that has been set is now sampled.  
To return to the condition of a step earlier after an  
adjustment has been made, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one  
only.  
Use [F3] to select “Spill Sponge” using the Mode item.  
Spill Sponge The noise remaining in the detailed areas is  
removed.  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample  
marker to the position of the remaining noise.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary  
encoder [Z].  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable,  
press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The noise in the area that has been set is now removed,  
and the colors become more natural.  
To return to the pre-sampling status after sampling has  
been executed, press [F5].  
The number of operations that can be undone is one  
only.  
Execute sampling in both the light and dark areas as the  
sample area.  
If the noise in the foreground image is not completely  
removed by carrying out the steps above, proceed with  
the FineTuning sub menu operation.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
[Spill–] [Spill+]  
In these modes, the noise in the foreground image can be removed or restored step by step through repeated sampling.  
[+]  
Spill  
[–]  
[Matte–] [Matte+]  
In these modes, the matte information is adjusted.  
If, for instance, the area of shadow in the foreground image is to be made lighter, use [Matte−] to adjust.  
Conversely, to make it darker, use [Matte+].  
Transparent images such as images of smoke or water can be made to stand out more.  
[–]  
Matte  
[+]  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
[Detail–] [Detail+]  
In these modes, the noise in the background image can be removed step by step.  
This is a useful way of adjusting images lost by other sampling operations to adjust the texture or transparency of images.  
[–]  
Detail  
[+]  
[Matte Sponge]  
In this mode, the semi-transparent parts of the subject in a foreground image are selected and made matte (non-transparent).  
Unlike [Clean FG Noise] on the Sample sub menu, the color information is not changed in the process.  
With [Clean FG Noise], the colors of the selected parts are restored to their original colors but, with [Matte Sponge], only the  
semi-transparent keys are made matte (non-transparent) while the colors remain unchanged and the original colors are not  
restored.  
[Make FG Trans]  
In this mode, the transparency of areas with a low transparency in the foreground image is increased.  
This is useful when, for instance, areas covered with dark smoke or clouds in a foreground image are to be made  
semi-transparent.  
[Restore Detail]  
In this mode, the transparency of areas with a high transparency in the background image is reduced.  
This is useful when, for instance, restoring the details of an image (such as an image with a subject who has loose hair or an  
image with smoke), which have been lost as a result of a [Clean BG Noise] or other such operation on the Sample sub menu,  
to what they were in the original image.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
[FineTuning]  
In this mode, detailed images can be adjusted.  
Step 6  
Finely adjust the chroma key signals which have been  
generated.  
On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the  
Sample sub menu.  
On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the  
Adjust sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select “Composite” using the View item.  
Use [F3] to select “FineTuning” using the Mode item.  
Use [F2], and adjust the width of the chroma key signals  
using the Narrow item.  
Using the positioner, move the position of the sample  
marker to the position to be sampled.  
To change the size of the sample marker, turn the rotary  
encoder [Z].  
The key signal width can be adjusted horizontally in 0.5  
(half-pixel) increments.  
Use [F3], and adjust the horizontal phase of the chroma  
key signals using the Phase item.  
If the sample area that has been set is acceptable,  
press the rotary encoder [Z].  
The key signal position can be moved horizontally in 0.5  
(half-pixel) increments.  
On the Chroma Key menu, use [F1] to display the  
Fine Tuning sub menu.  
Use [F2] to remove or restore the noise using the Spill  
item.  
When it is turned clockwise, a large amount of noise  
is removed from the foreground image, and the image  
colors increasingly approach the complementary color  
(opposite color) of the blue screen.  
When it is turned counterclockwise, the image colors  
approach the colors of the original foreground image.  
By turning [F3] clockwise, the matte of the colors closely  
resembling the colors of the foreground image can be  
adjusted using the Trans item.  
This is useful when, for instance, areas covered with  
dark smoke or clouds in a foreground image are to be  
made semi-transparent.  
By turning [F4] clockwise, the matte information for the  
colors closely resembling the colors of the background  
image can be adjusted using the Detail item.  
This is useful when, for instance, restoring the details  
of an image (such as an image with a subject who has  
loose hair or an image with smoke), which have been  
lost in the foreground image as a result of sampling, to  
what they were in the original image.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-3-7. Key decorations  
Selecting the Edge Fill settings  
A border, shadow or other edge can be added to the key.  
Materials to be inserted as edges can be set.  
Setting the key edge  
On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Edge2 sub  
menu.  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Edge1 sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the edge material using the Edge Fill  
items.  
Color  
CBGD1  
CBGD2  
Still1  
The color set using Edge Color is used.  
The color background is used.  
Use [F2] to select the edge type.  
Off  
An edge is not added.  
The still image video memory (Still1) is used.  
The still image video memory (Still2) is used.  
Border  
Drop  
A border is added around the entire edge.  
A diagonal border is added.  
Still2  
Clip1  
The moving image video memory (Clip1) is  
used.  
Shadow  
Outline  
A shadow is added.  
An outline (only a border with no fill) is added.  
Clip2  
The moving image video memory (Clip2) is  
used.  
Border  
Drop  
Setting the edge color  
On the Key menu, use [F1] to display the Edge Color  
sub menu.  
Shadow  
Outline  
Use [F2] ,[F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum  
of the edge color.  
To call the preset color  
Use [F3] to set the edge width.  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
Use [F4] to set the direction (in 45-degree increments)  
in which “Drop” and “Shadow” will be added.  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
(Top)  
180  
135  
90  
225  
270  
315  
0
(Left)  
(Right)  
45  
(Bottom)  
Use [F5] to set the darkness (Density) of the edges.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F2] to [F5] to set the area to be masked.  
1-3-8. Masking the key signals  
These steps are taken to mask the key signals using the  
mask signal of the box pattern.  
Operation/  
Parameter  
Description of  
setting  
Setting range/  
Initial value  
F2/  
Left  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
−25.00  
Key left position  
Key top position  
Key bottom position  
Key right position  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Key menu.  
F3/  
Top  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
25.00  
Use [F1] to display the Mask sub menu.  
F4/  
Bottom  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
−25.00  
F5/  
Right  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
25.00  
Use [F2], and select the masking method using the  
The Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and  
vice versa) and, similarly, the Top setting cannot exceed  
the Bottom setting (and vice versa).  
Mask item.  
Off  
The key signals are not masked.  
Manual  
The area that is set using the Mask Adjust  
sub menu is masked.  
<Key mask setting> (figure shows the default values)  
4:3  
The signals are masked to the 4:3 aspect  
ratio.  
Video signal range  
Area where the key signal is effective  
Area masked  
Use [F3] to set whether to invert the mask signal using  
the Invert item.  
On  
Off  
The mask signal is inverted.  
The mask signal is not inverted.  
50  
TOP (25)  
Use [F1] to display the Mask Adjust sub menu.  
0
BOTTOM (-25)  
-50  
(-25)  
(25)  
-50  
0
50  
LEFT  
RIGHT  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-3-9. Flying key  
PinP combinations using the flying key  
Using DVE effects, this key enables the key signals that have  
been input to be moved, expanded or contracted.  
In order for the flying key to take effect, select “SQ2: 8” as the  
key transition.  
When “Full” is selected using the Type item in “1-3-1.  
Selecting the key type”, PinP combinations can be performed  
using the flying key.  
Refer to “1-2-1. Selecting the wipe pattern”.  
(At this point in time, the Clip item and Gain item cannot be  
set on the Adjust sub menu.)  
When the key transition is executed, the keys are combined  
by the key signals set using the flying key menu.  
(The transition effect is fixed at MIX.)  
Since the flying key uses DVE effects, the image is delayed by  
one frame.  
With the full key, the image on the full screen serves as the  
key source signal so an edge will not be added unless a  
further step is taken.  
To add an edge, mask the key signals so that the key source  
signals are made smaller than the entire screen.  
For details on masking, refer to “1-3-8. Masking the key  
signals”.  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
Key menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Flying Key sub menu.  
1-3-10. Setting the priority  
The relative positions of the images when key, PinP1 and  
PinP2 images are to be superimposed onto one another can  
be set.  
Use [F2] to set the X coordinate of the key signal using  
the X-Pos item.  
Use [F3] to set the Y coordinate of the key signal using  
Press the k button to light its indicator, and display the  
the Y-Pos item.  
Key menu.  
Use [F4] to set the key signal change size (max. 400:  
Use [F1] to display the Key Priority sub menu.  
400 %) using the Size item.  
ABC  
Use [F2] to [F4] to set the relative positions using the  
ABC  
Low item, Middle item and High item.  
Low  
This is used to set the image to be placed at  
the bottom.  
Key signal  
When combined using  
the flying key  
Middle  
High  
This is used to set the image to be placed in  
the middle.  
In order to add the edge of the key before the DVE effect,  
the thickness of the edge is also changed when the size is  
changed.  
This is used to set the image to be placed at  
the top.  
Low:  
Key  
Middle:  
PinP1  
High:  
PinP2  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-4-2. Transition between PinP materials  
1-4. PinP (picture in picture)  
When a PinP bus material has been selected, the effect to be  
produced when images are switched can be executed as a  
MIX transition. (Bus transition function)  
Another image can be combined with the background image.  
This unit supports two PinP channels.  
 When one material set to the Dot by Dot mode and  
another material have been switched, cut switching where  
the images change in an instant is performed.  
1-4-1. Selecting the PinP channel and  
material  
Press the [PinP1] button (or [PinP2] button) among the AUX  
bus selector buttons.  
Press the t button to light its indicator, and display the  
Time menu.  
When the [PinP1] button (or [PinP2] button) is lit, the PinP1  
menu (or PinP2 menu) is displayed on the built-in display.  
The state in which the PinP1 materials (or PinP2 materials)  
are selected is now established for the AUX bus crosspoint  
buttons.  
Use [F1] to display the PinP1 BUS Trans sub menu (or  
PinP2 BUS Trans sub menu).  
The selected AUX bus crosspoint button lights in amber.  
(It will light in red if the selected signal is a PGM output  
signal.)  
Use [F3] and [F4] to set the transition time.  
Use [F5] to set enable or disable for the bus transition  
function.  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
While the transition is underway, the indicator of the transition  
source button lights, and the indicator of the transition  
destination button blinks.  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
When the transition is completed, the indicator of the  
transition source button goes off, and the indicator of the  
transition destination button lights.  
When another signal has been selected while a transition is  
underway, the processing for the transition will continue from  
the interim point.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-4-3. Selecting Shape  
1-4-4. PinP preview  
Square, Circle, Heart, Star or Flower can be selected as the  
shape used for combining PinP images.  
Select whether to output the PinP1 and PinP2 preview  
images to the preview output.  
Press the p button to light its indicator, and display the  
On the PinP sub menu, use [F5] to set the PVW item.  
PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu).  
Use [F1] to display the PinP sub menu.  
On  
Off  
An image with the PinP1 (or PinP2) effect  
added is output to the preview output.  
An image without the PinP1 (or PinP2) effect  
added is output to the preview output.  
HD:  
SD:  
16 : 9  
4 : 3  
The PVW On and Off settings can be allocated to the  
user buttons.  
When “PinP1 PVW” (or “PinP2 PVW”) is assigned to a  
user button, the PinP1 image (or PinP2 image) preview  
output is turned on or off every time the user button is  
pressed.  
When “PinP PVW” is assigned to a user button, the  
PinP1 image and PinP2 image preview outputs are  
simultaneously turned on or off every time the user  
button is pressed.  
0 %  
100 %  
Use [F2] and, using the Shape item, select the shape  
used for combining images.  
Refer to “3-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
Use [F3] to adjust the transmissivity (darkness) applying  
when the images are combined using the Density item.  
1-4-5. PinP transitions  
Set the transition time.  
On the Time menu, use [F1] to display the PinP1 sub  
menu (or PinP2 sub menu).  
As with background transitions, set the transition time.  
Refer to “1-1-6. Auto transition”.  
When the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button)  
in the transition area is pressed, the PinP1 image (or  
PinP2 image) transitions (fades in) for the length of the  
transition time that has been set.  
During fade-in, the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2  
ON] button) blinks in red, and when the transition is  
completed, it lights in red.  
When the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) is  
pressed after fade-in is completed, the PinP1 image (or  
PinP2 image) transitions (fades out).  
During fade-out, the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2  
ON] button) lights in red, and when the transition is  
completed, it goes off.  
If the [PinP1 ON] button (or [PinP2 ON] button) is  
pressed at any point during a transition, the direction of  
the transition is reversed.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-4-6. PinP adjustments  
Adjusting the PinP position and size  
Select the dot by dot mode  
While the PinP menu is selected, adjust the X and Y  
coordinates using the positioner in the positioner area, and  
adjust the size using the rotary encoder [Z]. Alternatively, the  
settings can be performed on the menus.  
When the system is set to the HD mode and an SD format  
image is to be used for the PinP material, the images can be  
combined in the dot by dot mode (actual-size images).  
In this mode, the SD format image will not be up-converted so  
image deterioration can be prevented.  
Press the p button to light its indicator, and display the  
 When “100.00” has been selected as the Size item  
setting on the Position sub menu, the size used for the  
combination will be the same number of lines as the SD  
format image.  
PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu).  
Use [F1] to display the Position sub menu.  
Press the i button to light its indicator, and display the  
Input menu.  
Either operate the positioner and the rotary encoder [Z]  
or use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to set the X and Y coordinates  
and the size using the X-Pos, Y-Pos and Size items.  
Use [F2] to select the signals for inputting the PinP  
material using the Select item.  
Use [F1] to display the FS sub menu.  
Use [F3] to select “Dot by Dot” using the Mode item, and  
press the [F3] to enter the selection.  
SD  
HD  
PinP material  
SD  
PinP combined image  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-4-7. Linking PinP1 and PinP2  
The PinP1 and PinP2 images perform a symmetrical  
operation for the axis whose coordinates and rotation angle  
have been set.  
When “Center” has been selected as the Symmetry  
setting  
The coordinates and rotation angle are made  
symmetrical to the center.  
The image serving as the reference is the PinP image of the  
menu being operated.  
Setting the priority  
Set the relative positions of the images when key, PinP1 and  
PinP2 images are to be superimposed onto one another.  
Refer to “1-3-10. Setting the priority”.  
Linking PinP1 and PinP2  
Press the p button to light its indicator, and display the  
Copying the settings  
PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu).  
The PinP1 settings can be copied to PinP2 and, similarly, the  
PinP2 settings can be copied to PinP1.  
Use [F1] to display the Sync sub menu.  
On the PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu), use [F1] to display  
the Sync sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the position that will serve as the  
reference using the Symmetry item.  
The image serving as the reference is the PinP image  
of the menu being operated.  
Use [F2] to select “Off” using the Symmetry item.  
When “X” has been selected as the Symmetry  
setting  
When [F5] is pressed, the PinP1 (or PinP2) settings are  
The coordinates and rotation angle are made  
symmetrical to the X axis.  
copied and set in PinP2 (or PinP1).  
Note  
The following settings are not copied.  
Trim sub menu items  
When “Y” has been selected as the Symmetry  
setting  
The coordinates and rotation angle are made  
symmetrical to the Y axis.  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-4-8. PinP decorations  
A border or soft effect can be added to PinP.  
Press the p button to light its indicator, and display the  
PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu).  
Use [F1] to display the Border sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set On (or Off) for the border using the  
Border item.  
Use [F3] to set the width of the border using the Width  
item.  
Use [F4] to set the amount of soft effect using the Soft  
item. The soft effect is OFF if 0.0 is set.  
When “On” has been selected as the Border item  
setting, the ratio of the soft effect to the border width is  
indicated as the amount of soft effect.  
When only the soft effect is to be added to PinP, select  
“Off” as the Border item setting.  
Use [F5] to set the change in the border width using the  
Mode item.  
Fix  
The border width is kept constant.  
Variable  
The border width changes to suit the PinP  
size.  
Setting the border color  
On the PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu), use [F1] to display  
the Border Color sub menu.  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum  
of the border color.  
To call the preset color  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F1] to display the Trim Adjust sub menu, and use  
1-4-9. Trimming settings  
[F2], [F3], [F4] and [F5] to set the trimming values.  
Operation/  
Parameter  
Description of  
setting  
Setting range/  
Initial value  
Press the p button to light its indicator, and display the  
PinP1 menu (or PinP2 menu).  
F2/  
Left  
Trimming value at  
left  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
−40.00  
Use [F1] to display the Trim sub menu.  
F3/  
Top  
Trimming value at  
top  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
40.00  
F4/  
Bottom  
Trimming value at  
bottom  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
−40.00  
Use [F2] to select the trimming type using the Trim item.  
F5/  
Right  
Trimming value at  
right  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
40.00  
Off  
4:3  
No trimming  
Automatic trimming so that the aspect ratio  
is 4:3.  
<Trimming settings> (figure shows the default values)  
Manual  
Trimming using the value set on the Trim  
Adjust sub menu.  
Area trimmed  
Area where PinP is effective  
Use [F3] to select the operation to be performed during  
the manual setting using the Manual item.  
Original size of PinP  
Free  
The Left, Right, Top and Bottom parameters  
change independently.  
50  
TOP (40)  
However, the Left setting cannot exceed the  
Right setting (and vice versa) and, similarly,  
the Top setting cannot exceed the Bottom  
setting (and vice versa).  
0
Pair  
The settings are changed in such a way that  
the Left and Right trimming amounts and the  
Top and Bottom trimming amounts are the  
same. (This makes for a top-bottom and left-  
right symmetry.)  
BOTTOM (-40)  
-50  
-50  
(-40)  
0
50  
(40)  
LEFT  
RIGHT  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-5. DSK (downstream key)  
Use [F4] to select the fill type using the Fill item.  
Characters or other images can be combined with the  
background image.  
Bus  
The bus signal is used for the key fill signal.  
Matte  
The internal fill matte is used for the key fill  
signal.  
1-5-1. Selecting the DSK type  
Setting the fill matte color  
Press the d button to light its indicator, and display the  
DSK menu.  
On the DSK menu, use [F1] to display the Fill Matte sub  
Use [F1] to display the DSK sub menu.  
menu.  
Use [F2] to select the Type item.  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum  
of the fill matte.  
Lum  
This is for creating the key signals from  
(luminance key/ the luminance component of the key fill  
self key)  
signal.  
To call the preset color  
Linear  
(linear key/  
EXT key)  
This is for creating the key signals from  
the luminance component of the key  
source signal.  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
It is used when the key source signal and  
key fill signal are different.  
Since the luminance key is operated as a self key, the  
key fill signals are used as the key source signals.  
When the luminance key has been selected as the  
downstream key type, the key signals will remain  
unchanged even when the key source signals are  
switched.  
When using the linear key, use material with a black  
background and white characters or shape to be  
combined by the key as the key source signal.  
Material which is not black and white may not be  
combined clearly.  
Material with a white background and black characters,  
etc. can be reversed using the key invert function for  
use.  
When the luminance key has been selected, the  
chroma components can be contained in the key signals  
generated in view of the fact that it is used as a self key.  
(This is not applied to the linear key.)  
Use [F3] to select the setting using the Lum Key item.  
Chroma On  
In addition to the luminance components,  
the chroma components are also factored in  
when generating the key signals.  
Use this setting if colors with low luminance  
components are used for the key signals  
(when, for instance, blue characters are to be  
removed).  
Chroma Off  
The key signals are generated only from the  
luminance components.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-5-2. Selecting the DSK material  
1-5-3. DSK transitions  
Set the transition time.  
Selecting the DSK fill signal and DSK source signal  
Press the t button to light its indicator, and display the  
Time menu.  
Press the [DSK] button in the AUX bus selection area to  
switch the selection of the DSK fill signal (indicator lights in  
amber) and DSK source signal (indicator lights in green).  
Use [F1] to display the DSK sub menu.  
As with background transitions, set the transition time.  
Refer to “1-1-6. Auto transition”.  
<Selecting the DSK fill signal>  
When the [DSK ON] button in the transition area is  
pressed, the DSK image is combined (fades in) for the  
length of the transition time that has been set.  
While the indicator of the [DSK] button is lit in amber, press  
one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the  
DSK fill signal.  
The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button  
lights in amber. (It lights in red if the selected signal is  
being output from the PGM connector.)  
During fade-in, the [DSK ON] button blinks in red, and  
when the transition is completed, it lights in red.  
When the [DSK ON] button is pressed after fade-in is  
completed, the DSK image transitions (fades out).  
During fade-out, the [DSK ON] button lights in red, and  
when the transition (fade-out) is completed, it goes off.  
If the [DSK ON] button is pressed at any point during a  
transition, the direction of the transition is reversed.  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
Lighting in amber  
<Selecting the DSK source signal>  
While the indicator of the [DSK] button is lit in green, press  
one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons 1 to 12 to select the  
DSK source signal.  
The indicator of the selected AUX bus crosspoint button  
lights in green. (It lights in red if the selected signal is being  
output from the PGM connector.)  
Since the luminance key is operated as a self key, the key  
fill signals are used as the key source signals. When the  
luminance key has been selected as the downstream key  
type, the key signals will remain unchanged even when the  
key source signals are switched.  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
Lighting in green  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-5-5. DSK adjustments  
1-5-4. DSK preview  
The DSK definition can be adjusted.  
Select whether to output the DSK preview image to the  
preview output.  
Press the d button to light its indicator, and display the  
DSK menu.  
Press the d button to light its indicator, and display the  
DSK menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Adjust sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the DSK sub menu.  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the DSK (downstream  
key) definition.  
Use [F5] to set the PVW item.  
On  
An image with the DSK effect added is output  
to the preview output.  
Use [F5] to set key invert.  
If “On” is set, the key signals generated internally are  
inverted.  
Off  
An image without the DSK effect added is  
output to the preview output.  
Operation/  
Description of setting  
Setting range  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
On, Off  
Parameter  
F2/  
Reference level for  
The PVW On and Off settings can be allocated to the user  
buttons.  
Refer to “3-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
Clip  
generating key signals  
F3/  
Gain  
Key amplitude  
Key density  
F4/  
Density  
F5/  
Invert  
Key signal inversion  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-5-6. DSK decorations  
Setting Edge Fill  
A border, shadow or other type of edge can be added to DSK.  
Materials to be inserted as edges can be set.  
Setting the edge  
On the DSK menu, use [F1] to display the Edge2 sub  
menu.  
Press the d button to light its indicator, and display the  
DSK menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Edge1 sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the edge material using the Edge Fill  
item.  
Color  
CBGD1  
CBGD2  
Still1  
The color set using Edge Color is used.  
The color background is used.  
Use [F2] to select the edge type.  
Off  
An edge is not added.  
The still image video memory (Still1) is used.  
The still image video memory (Still2) is used.  
Border  
Drop  
A border is added around the entire edge.  
A diagonal border is added.  
Still2  
Clip1  
The moving image video memory (Clip1) is  
used.  
Shadow  
Outline  
A shadow is added.  
An outline (only a border with no fill) is added.  
Clip2  
The moving image video memory (Clip2) is  
used.  
Border  
Drop  
Setting the edge color  
On the DSK menu, use [F1] to display the Edge Color  
sub menu.  
Shadow  
Outline  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the Hue, Sat and Lum  
of the edge color.  
To call the preset color  
Use [F3] to set the edge width.  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
Use [F4] to set the direction (in 45-degree increments)  
in which “Drop” and “Shadow” will be added.  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
(Top)  
180  
135  
90  
225  
270  
315  
0
(Left)  
(Right)  
45  
(Bottom)  
Use [F5] to set the darkness (Density) of the edges.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F2] to [F5] to set the area to be masked.  
1-5-7. Masking the DSK signals  
These steps are taken to mask the DSK signals using the  
mask signal of the box pattern.  
Operation/  
Parameter  
Description of  
setting  
Setting range/  
Initial value  
F2/  
Left  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
−25.00  
DSK left position  
DSK top position  
DSK bottom position  
DSK right position  
Press the d button to light its indicator, and display the  
F3/  
Top  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
25.00  
DSK menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Mask sub menu.  
F4/  
Bottom  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
−25.00  
F5/  
Right  
−50.00 to 50.00/  
25.00  
The Left setting cannot exceed the Right setting (and  
vice versa) and, similarly, the Top setting cannot exceed  
the Bottom setting (and vice versa).  
Use [F2], and select the masking method using the  
Mask item.  
Off  
The DSK signals are not masked.  
Manual  
The area that is set using the Mask Adjust  
sub menu is masked.  
<DSK mask setting> (figure shows the default values)  
Video signal range  
4:3  
The signals are masked to the 4:3 aspect  
ratio.  
Area where the DSK signal is effective  
Area masked  
Use [F3] to set whether to invert the mask signal using  
the Invert item.  
On  
Off  
The mask signal is inverted.  
50  
The mask signal is not inverted.  
TOP (25)  
Use [F1] to display the Mask Adjust sub menu.  
0
BOTTOM (-25)  
-50  
(-25)  
(25)  
-50  
0
50  
LEFT  
RIGHT  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
PinP2  
This links the “On” or “Off” setting of the  
[PinP2 ON] button with the “On” or “Off”  
setting of the [KEY ON] button.  
1-6. Key Link  
This function makes it possible to link the “On” or “Off” setting  
of the [DSK ON] button and PinP buttons ([PinP1 ON] and  
[PinP2 ON]) with the “On” or “Off” (button indicator lights or  
off) of the [KEY ON] button.  
When the [PinP2 ON] button is “On”, the  
[PinP2 ON] button remains “On” even when  
the [KEY ON] button is set to “On”.  
When the [PinP2 ON] button is “Off”, the  
[PinP2 ON] button remains “Off” even when  
the [KEY ON] button is set to “Off”.  
ワバン  
ヸリヱユチュリンユヤヵリヰワ  
There is no link with the auto transition  
operation initiated by setting the [AUTO]  
button to “On” when the [KEY] button has  
been selected.  
レユヺ  
ヰワ  
ョヵャ  
ヰワ  
ャレヨュ  
レユヺ  
ヮリヹ  
ヮリヹ  
ヸリヱユ  
ヸリヱユ  
PinP1/2  
This links the “On” or “Off” settings of the  
[PinP1 ON] button and [PinP2 ON] button  
with the “On” or “Off” setting of the [KEY ON]  
button.  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヰワ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ヰワ  
ヮリヹ  
ヸリヱユ  
When the [PinP1 ON] button and  
[PinP2 ON] button are “On”, the [PinP1 ON]  
button and [PinP2 ON] button remain “On”  
even when the [KEY ON] button is set to  
“On”.  
ュヴレ  
ヰワ  
ヤヶヵ  
モヶヵヰ  
When the [PinP1 ON] button and  
[PinP2 ON] button are “Off”, the [PinP1 ON]  
button and [PinP2 ON] button remain “Off”  
even when the [KEY ON] button is set to  
“Off”.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Operate sub menu.  
There is no link with the auto transition  
operation initiated by setting the [AUTO]  
button to “On” when the [KEY] button has  
been selected.  
Use [F3] to select the link operation using the Key Link  
item.  
Off  
This releases the link with the [KEY ON]  
button.  
DSK  
This links the “On” or “Off” setting of the  
[DSK ON] button with the “On” or “Off” setting  
of the [KEY ON] button.  
When the [DSK ON] button is “On”, the  
[DSK ON] button remains “On” even when  
the [KEY ON] button is set to “On”.  
When the [DSK ON] button is “Off”, the  
[DSK ON] button remains “Off” even when  
the [KEY ON] button is set to “Off”.  
There is no link with the auto transition  
operation initiated by setting the [AUTO]  
button to “On” when the [KEY] button has  
been selected.  
PinP1  
This links the “On” or “Off” setting of the  
[PinP1 ON] button with the “On” or “Off”  
setting of the [KEY ON] button.  
When the [PinP1 ON] button is “On”, the  
[PinP1 ON] button remains “On” even when  
the [KEY ON] button is set to “On”.  
When the [PinP1 ON] button is “Off”, the  
[PinP1 ON] button remains “Off” even when  
the [KEY ON] button is set to “Off”.  
There is no link with the auto transition  
operation initiated by setting the [AUTO]  
button to “On” when the [KEY] button has  
been selected.  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Selecting the image  
1-7. FTB (Fade to Black)  
The user can fade out from a program image to the black  
screen or fade in to a program image from a black screen.  
The image to be used for fading out can be selected.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Set the duration of the transition.  
Press the t button to light its indicator, and display the  
Time menu.  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the FTB sub menu.  
As with a background transition, set the transition time.  
Refer to “1-1-6. Auto transition”.  
Use [F2] to select the image to appear when fading out  
ワバン  
using the FTB Source item.  
ヸリヱユチュリンユヤヵリヰワ  
Still1  
Still2  
Clip1  
The still image video memory (Still1) is used.  
The still image video memory (Still2) is used.  
レユヺ  
ヰワ  
ョヵャ  
ヰワ  
ャレヨュ  
レユヺ  
ヮリヹ  
ヮリヹ  
ヸリヱユ  
ヸリヱユ  
The moving image video memory (Clip1) is  
used.  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヰワ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ヰワ  
ヮリヹ  
ヸリヱユ  
Clip2  
The moving image video memory (Clip2) is  
used.  
ュヴレ  
ヰワ  
ヤヶヵ  
モヶヵヰ  
CBGD1  
CBGD2  
White  
The color background is used.  
White background  
Black background  
When the [FTB ON] button in the transition area is  
pressed, fade-out to the black screen is initiated for the  
length of the transition time that has been set.  
Black  
If a setting other than “White” or “Black” has been  
selected using the FTB Source item, the corresponding  
crosspoint button will light in red in the FTB status.  
During fade-out, the indicator of the [FTB ON] button  
blinks in red, and it lights in red when the transition  
(fade-out) is completed, and the black screen is  
displayed.1  
When the [FTB ON] button is pressed with the black  
screen displayed, fade-in to the program image is  
initiated.  
During fade-in, the indicator of the [FTB ON] button  
lights in red, and it goes off when the transition (fade-in)  
is completed.  
If the [FTB ON] button is pressed at any point during a  
transition, the direction of the transition is reversed.  
1: In the FTB status, the crosspoint button which is  
normally lit in red lights in amber.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-8-2. Setting the Wash effect  
The gradation effect for color backgrounds can be set.  
1-8. Internal color signals  
This unit supports two sets of internal color signals.  
Selecting the Wash effect and setting the colors  
1-8-1. Setting the color background  
The color background to be used by the bus can be set.  
Two methods are available: under one method the Hue (hue),  
Sat (color saturation) and Lum (luminance) are set, and under  
the other the 8 preset colors (white, yellow, cyan, green,  
magenta, red, blue and black) are called.  
Press the b button to light its indicator, and display the  
Color Background menu.  
Use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Wash sub menu (or  
CBGD2 Wash sub menu).  
The Hue, Sat and Lum of the called colors can also be  
adjusted.  
Adjusting the colors  
Use [F2] to set the Wash (gradation) effect using the  
Wash item.  
Press the b button to light its indicator, and display the  
On  
Off  
The gradation effect is added.  
Color Background menu.  
The gradation effect is not added.  
Use [F1] to display the CBGD1 Main sub menu (or  
CBGD2 Main sub menu).  
Use [F3] to set the color of the Wash (gradation) effect  
using the Color item.  
Dual  
A dual-color gradation effect is added.  
(This results in a gradation of two colors,  
namely, the CBGD1 Main color and the  
CBGD1 Sub color.)  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to perform the color adjustments  
(Hue, Sat and Lum).  
Rainbow  
The rainbow color gradation effect is added.  
To call the preset color  
When “Dual” has been selected, use [F1] to display the  
CBGD1 Sub sub menu (or CBGD2 Sub sub menu), and  
set the sub color.  
Use [F5] to select the preset color using the Load item,  
and press the [F5].  
When [F5] is pressed, what has been set so far is  
canceled and replaced with the preset color values.  
To save the values that were set before calling the preset  
color, refer to “1-10. Memory”.  
Use [F2], [F3] and [F4] to adjust the colors (Hue, Sat  
and Lum).  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Adjusting the Wash waveforms  
On the Color Background menu, use [F1] to display the  
CBGD1 Wave sub menu (or CBGD2 Wave sub menu).  
Use [F2] to select the gradation waveforms using the  
Pattern item.  
Sine  
Saw  
Sine waves are selected.  
Sawtooth waves are selected.  
Use [F3] to select the gradation cycle using the Cycle  
item.  
Use [F4] to select the gradation phase using the Phase  
item.  
Use [F5] to select the gradation angle using the Angle  
item.  
Setting the Wash movements  
On the Color Background menu, use [F1] to display the  
CBGD1 Move sub menu (or CBGD2 Move sub menu).  
Use [F2] to set the gradation movement using the Move  
item.  
Off  
No movement is set.  
Roll  
The gradations are scrolled.  
The gradations are rotated.  
Rotation  
Use [F3] to set the movement speed using the Speed  
item.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-9-2. AUX1 transitions  
1-9. Switching the AUX output  
The MIX transition is executed when the output signal set for  
AUX1 is switched.  
1-9-1. Selecting the AUX output materials  
The output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) can be  
selected.  
Press the [AUX1] button of the AUX bus selector  
buttons.  
The selected button and its corresponding AUX bus  
crosspoint button light in amber.  
Press one of the [AUX1] to [AUX4] buttons among the  
AUX bus selector buttons.  
The selected button lights in amber.  
Press the AUX bus crosspoint button for the output  
signal to be switched to.  
Press one of the AUX bus crosspoint buttons.  
The selected signal is output to the pressed [AUX1] to  
[AUX4] button.  
The MIX transition is now initiated for the length of the  
transition time that was set using the Time menu.  
While the transition is underway, the transition  
source AUX button lights in amber, and the transition  
destination AUX button blinks in amber.  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
As soon as the transition is completed, the transition  
source AUX button goes off, and the transition  
destination AUX button lights in amber.  
Furthermore, when another signal is selected at  
a midway point through a transition, the transition  
processing continues from that midway point.  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
The button with the signals selected by AUX1  
lights in amber.  
<Signals that can be selected by the AUX bus>  
Name of signal  
SDI IN1 to 8  
DVI IN  
Description of signal  
SDI input signal 1 to 8  
レユヺ  
ヱㄊㄏヱヒ  
ヱㄊㄏヱビ  
ュヴレ  
モヶヹヒ  
モヶヹビ  
モヶヹピ  
モヶヹフ  
ュリヴヱ  
ヮヷ  
ヱヷヸ  
ヱヨヮ  
モヮャユンチホチョリロロチバチヨンユユワチホチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹチャヶヴチュユロユヨモヵリヰワ  
モヶヹバュリヴヱチヴヰヶンヤユ  
モヶヹ  
ヴラリョヵ  
DVI-D input signal  
INPUT A1,  
INPUT A2,  
INPUT B1,  
INPUT B2  
Input signal A1, Input signal A2,  
Input signal B1, Input signal B2  
Blinks in amber (while the transition is underway).  
Lights in amber.  
PGM  
Program video signal  
Preview video signal  
Clean signal  
PVW  
CLN  
MV  
Multi view display output signal  
Key output signal  
KeyOut  
CBGD1, CBGD2  
Color background 1, 2  
CBAR  
Color bar  
Still1, Still2  
Clip1, Clip2  
MEM-PVW  
Video memory (still image) 1, 2  
Video memory (moving imag) 1, 2  
Memory preview video signals  
When the AUX bus for which “MV” has been selected  
is displayed on the sub screen of the multi view display,  
the images are looped as if two mirrors were facing each  
other.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-9-3. Setting enable/disable for the AUX1  
transition  
The AUX1 transition time and transition enable/disable can be  
set.  
Press the t button to light its indicator, and display the  
Time menu.  
Use [F1] to display the AUX1 BUS Trans sub menu.  
When the transition time is to be set in frame units, use  
[F4] for the setting.  
When the transition time is to be set in second units,  
use [F3] to set the seconds and [F4] to set the frames.  
Any time from 0 to 999f can be set. The time which can  
be set when seconds are used as the display unit differs  
depending on the system format.  
59.94i:  
50i:  
max. 33s09f  
max. 39s24f  
max. 41s15f  
59.94p:  
50p:  
max. 16s39f  
max. 19s49f  
24PsF:  
23.98PsF: max. 41s15f  
Use [F5] to set enable or disable for the transition using  
the Transition item.  
Enable  
Disable  
Enable  
Disable  
When disable has been set for the transition, the output  
signals are switched with no transition when the output  
signals set in AUX1 is switched.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-10. Memory  
Shot memories  
The background transition pattern, PinP size, border width and other video effects can be registered in the memory and recalled.  
The memory used for this is referred to as a shot memory.  
By setting effect dissolve, it is possible to ensure a smooth change of the switching from the current images to the images or  
operations registered in the shot memory.  
Event memories  
A multiple number of the video effects which can be registered in the shot memory can be registered and continuously played  
back while the current event and next event are interpolated to achieve the effect of a smooth transition. A group of these events  
are referred to as an event memory. Up to 64 events can be registered in one event memory.  
Event 1  
Interpolation  
Event 2  
Interpolation  
Event 3  
Event memory  
Up to a hundred shot memories and a hundred event memories can be registered.  
The related operations are performed using the number keys.  
Page 1 to page 10 can be specified for the page numbers of the memories.  
Numbers 1 to 10 can be specified as the respective memory numbers for the specified page numbers.  
Selecting the memory numbers  
Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the memory to be selected.  
Press the P button.  
The P button indicator lights up, and the mode for specifying the memory page number is established.  
The number key of the currently selected page lights in amber.  
The number keys of the page numbers in which more than one memory is registered light in green.  
The indicators of the number keys of page numbers in which no memories have been registered remain extinguished.  
Press the number key (1 to 10) of the page number.  
When the page number is determined, the P button indicator goes off, and the mode for specifying the memory number  
is established.  
If the page number is not going to be changed, press the P button to turn off its indicator instead of pressing the number  
key. This establishes the mode for specifying the memory number.  
Press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the memory number.  
(Hold down the number key when specifying a memory number to register or delete the memory.)  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-10-1. Memory registration and recall items  
Applicable bus  
BKGD  
Material selection  
Transition  
Pattern  
Menu  
PGM/A bus  
Fader amount  
BKGD patterns  
Background  
PST/B bus  
Wipe direction  
(MIX, WIPE)  
Color Background  
Key  
Key Fill bus  
Fader amount  
KEY patterns  
Key  
Key Source bus  
Wipe direction  
(MIX, WIPE)  
Chroma Key  
PinP1  
PinP2  
PinP1 bus  
PinP1 ON/OFF  
PinP1  
PinP2 bus  
PinP2 ON/OFF  
PinP2  
1-10-2. Storing the settings in the memory (Store)  
Images and operations to be registered can be set and then registered in the memories.  
ヴラヰヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ヴヵヰンユ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
ユヷユワヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ンユ  
ヤモロロ  
 
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮヒ  
ュユロ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ンユヷ  
ユワヵユン  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮビ  
パバヒパ  
ユュリヵ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
Using the unit, set the images or operations to be kept  
Press the [STORE] button.  
in the memory.  
The [STORE] button indicator lights up, and the  
operations of other memory buttons — [EVENT MEM]  
(or [SHOT MEM]), [PLUGIN MEM1] and  
Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the  
memory in which the images or operations are to be  
registered.  
[PLUGIN MEM2] — no longer take effect.  
Depending on the operation that was performed last,  
the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button, [DEL] button or  
[EDIT] button lights.  
Press the P button, and press the number key (1 to  
10) corresponding to the page number.  
Hold down (for 2 seconds or so) the number key (1 to  
10) corresponding to the number of the memory to be  
registered.  
Select the bus (BKGD, KEY, PinP1 or PinP2) to be  
registered in the memory.  
From the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu),  
select the Store Select sub menu, and then select “On”.  
Refer to “1-10-1. Memory registration and recall  
items” and “1-10-6. Selecting the buses whose  
settings are to be registered and or played back”.  
When the registration is completed, the number key  
corresponding to the memory number lights in green.  
The number keys whose indicators are lit in green  
have memories already registered in them. Delete the  
memory corresponding to the number key concerned,  
and register the new memory.  
When registering the BKGD (PGM/A or PST/B bus),  
KEY bus, PinP1 bus or PinP2 bus, set whether the  
“Material selection” item is to be stored.  
Repeat the above steps to register other kinds of  
settings in the memories.  
From the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu),  
select the XPT Disable sub menu, and then select “Off”.  
Refer to “1-10-1. Memory registration and recall  
items” and “1-10-7. Registering the material selection  
items”.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the  
number for the memory whose operations are to be  
recalled.  
1-10-3. Recalling the operations stored in  
the memory (Recall)  
In the case of a shot memory, the video effects are  
recalled, and playback starts.  
ヴラヰヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ヴヵヰンユ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
During playback, the number key corresponding to the  
memory number blinks in green.  
ユヷユワヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ンユ  
ヤモロロ  
 
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
In the case of an event memory, the events are  
recalled, and playback starts.  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮヒ  
ュユロ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ユワヵユン  
ンユヷ  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
During playback, the number key corresponding to the  
memory number blinks in green.  
If there is a PAUSE event, playback pauses at that  
event, and the number key corresponding to the  
memory number blinks in amber.  
Each time the number key corresponding to the  
memory number is pressed, playback or pause is  
selected alternately, and this selection is repeated.  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮビ  
パバヒパ  
ユュリヵ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the  
memory whose operations are to be recalled.  
Depending on the operation that was performed last,  
the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button, [DEL] button or  
[EDIT] button lights.  
When playback of the effects or events in the recalled  
memory number starts, the C button is enabled, and  
its indicator lights up. If this button is pressed during  
playback, playback is terminated.  
Select the bus (BKGD, KEY, PinP1 or PinP2) to be  
recalled from the memory.  
From the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu),  
select the Recall Select sub menu, and then select “On”.  
Refer to “1-10-6. Selecting the buses whose settings  
are to be registered and or played back”.  
When selecting materials using the crosspoint  
buttons on the operation panel instead of using the  
registered “Material selection” item materials, press the  
[XPT DSBL] button to light its indicator in red.  
Refer to “1-10-1. Memory registration and recall  
items”.  
Press the [RECALL] button.  
The [RECALL] button indicator lights up, and the  
number key in which the memory is registered lights in  
green.  
The operations of other memory buttons —  
[EVENT MEM] (or [SHOT MEM]), [PLUGIN MEM1] and  
[PLUGIN MEM2] — no longer take effect.  
Press the P button, and press the number key (1 to  
10) corresponding to the page number.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Memory recall  
1-10-4. Memory preview  
The video effects in the shot memory or event memory can  
be output to the program signals after checking them using  
the memory preview bus (MEM-PVW).  
Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the  
memory whose video effects are to be recalled to select  
the memory.  
(Press the button of the memory with the video effects  
for preview playback.)  
Depending on the operation performed last, the  
indicator of the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button,  
[DEL] button or [EDIT] button lights up.  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu).  
Use [F1] to display the MEM PVW sub menu.  
Select the bus (BKGD, Key, PinP1 or PinP2) to be  
recalled from the memory.  
From the Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu),  
select the Recall Select sub menu, and then select “On”  
or “Off”.  
Refer to “1-10-6. Selecting the buses whose settings  
are to be registered and or played back”.  
Use [F2] to select “MEM-PVW” using the Mode item.  
PGM  
The video effects are output to the program  
signals.  
MEM-PVW  
The video effects are first output to the  
memory preview bus (MEM-PVW) and then  
output to the program signals.  
When selecting materials using the crosspoint buttons  
on the operation panel instead of using the registered  
“Material selection” item materials, press the [XPT  
DSBL] button to light its indicator in red.  
Refer to“1-10-1. Memory registration and recall  
items”.  
Shot memory/  
Event memory  
Press the [RECALL] button.  
Recalled  
The [RECALL] button indicator lights up, and the  
number key in which the memory is registered lights in  
green.  
The operations of other memory buttons —  
[EVENT MEM] (or [SHOT MEM]), [PLUGIN MEM1] and  
[PLUGIN MEM2] — no longer take effect.  
ヮㄐㄅㄆホ  
チヱヨヮ  
ヮㄐㄅㄆホ  
チヮユヮノヱヷヸ  
ヰㄖㄕㄑㄖㄕホ  
チヮユヮノヱヷヸ  
Memory preview bus  
Press the P button, and press the number key (1 to  
10) corresponding to the page number.  
Preview playback (output to the memory preview  
signals)  
Program bus  
ヰㄖㄕㄑㄖㄕホ  
チヱヨヮ  
Press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the  
number for the preview playback memory.  
The preview images are output to the memory preview  
bus (MEM-PVW).  
During preview playback, the number key  
corresponding to the memory number blinks in green.  
If there is a PAUSE event, preview playback pauses at  
that event, and the number key corresponding to the  
memory number blinks in amber.  
Program images  
Preview images  
The resolution of the images output from the memories  
Each time the number key corresponding to the  
memory number is pressed, preview playback or  
pause is selected alternately, and this selection is  
repeated.  
is lower than normal.  
When preview playback is completed, the indicators of  
the number key corresponding to the memory number  
and [TAKE/ENTER] button light in amber.  
If the number key corresponding to the memory  
number is now pressed again, preview playback  
resumes.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-10-5. Deleting the operations stored in  
the memory (Delete)  
Program output (output to the program signals)  
For program output, press the [TAKE/ENTER] button.  
ヴラヰヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ヴヵヰンユ  
During output, the [TAKE/ENTER] button indicator  
blinks in green.  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
ユヷユワヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ンユ  
ヤモロロ  
 
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
In the case of an event memory which contains a  
PAUSE event, the output pauses at that event, and  
the [TAKE/ENTER] button indicator blinks in amber.  
To resume the output, press the [TAKE/ENTER]  
button.  
Each time the [TAKE/ENTER] button is pressed,  
output or pause is selected alternately, and this  
selection is repeated.  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮヒ  
ュユロ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ンユヷ  
ユワヵユン  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮビ  
パバヒパ  
ユュリヵ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
Press the [SHOT MEM] or [EVENT MEM] button of the  
memory whose operations are to be deleted to select  
the memory.  
When output is completed, the [TAKE/ENTER] button  
indicators lights in amber.  
The selected button lights in amber.  
When program output is started, the C button takes  
effect, and its indicator lights up.  
Depending on the operation that was performed last,  
the [STORE] button, [RECALL] button, [DEL] button or  
[EDIT] button lights.  
If the C button is pressed during output, playback is  
terminated.  
Press the [DEL] button.  
<Button lighting statuses>  
During preview playback  
During  
The [DEL] button lights in red.  
The button of the number key containing the stored  
operations lights in green.  
Button  
Pause  
Stop  
playback  
To change a page number, press the P button, and  
press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding to the  
page number.  
Next, press the number key (1 to 10) corresponding  
to the number of the memory whose operations are to  
be deleted.  
Number key  
corresponding  
to memory  
numbers  
Blinks  
(in green)  
Blinks  
(in amber)  
Lights  
(in amber)  
Lights  
(in amber)  
Hold down (for 2 seconds or so) the number key (1 to  
10) corresponding to the number of the memory whose  
operations are to be deleted.  
T
C
The button of the pressed number key goes off.  
As soon as the stored operations are deleted, the C  
button becomes operable and lights.  
If the button is pressed while the C button indicator  
is lit and the button was operable, the operation  
performed last is canceled.  
During program output  
Button  
During output  
Pause  
Stop  
Number key  
corresponding  
to memory  
numbers  
Blinks  
(in green)  
Blinks  
(in amber)  
Lights  
(in amber)  
Blinks  
Blinks  
Lights  
(in green)  
(in amber)  
(in amber)  
T
C
Lights  
(in amber)  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-10-6. Selecting the buses whose settings  
are to be registered and or played  
back  
Selecting the buses for playing back memory settings  
Select the bus used for playing back shot memory or event  
memory settings.  
Selecting the buses for registering memories  
When the memory is played back, the settings of the  
registered bus are played back.  
Select the bus used for registering shot memories and event  
memories.  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu).  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu).  
Use [F1] to display the Recall Select sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Store Select sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the BKGD item, [F3] to set the Key item,  
[F4] to set the PinP1 item, and [F5] to set the PinP2  
item.  
Use [F2] to set the BKGD item, [F3] to set the Key item,  
[F4] to set the PinP1 item, and [F5] to set the PinP2  
item.  
On  
The bus settings are played back when the  
memory is played back.  
On  
The bus settings are registered in the  
memories.  
However, they will not be played back  
if they have not been registered in the  
memory.  
Off  
The bus settings are not registered in the  
memories.  
Off  
The bus settings are not played back when  
the memory is played back.  
 When the e button is pressed, the Shot Memory menu  
(or Event Memory menu) appears on the built-in display,  
and the information of the registered memories appears in  
the status area on the built-in display.  
However, the information is not displayed when the [EDIT]  
button indicator is lit.  
<Example of memory information display>  
Page: 1 (1 to 10)  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F3] to set the PinP bus transition using the PinP  
1-10-7. Registering the material selection  
items  
Set whether or not to register the “Material selection” items of  
the buses.  
Bus item.  
Dissolve  
The PinP bus images are switched using the  
dissolve effect.  
Cut  
The PinP bus images are switched using the  
cut effect.  
Refer to “1-10-1. Memory registration and recall items”.  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Use [F4] to select the effect used for switching the  
colors using the Hue Path item.  
Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu).  
The following colors are targeted by Hue.  
Use [F1] to display the XPT Disable sub menu.  
Colors of the color background  
Colors of the borders  
Colors of the edges  
Colors of the fill matte  
Use [F2] to set the BKGD item, [F3] to set the Key item,  
[F4] to set the PinP1 item, and [F5] to set the PinP2  
item.  
Short  
Long  
CW  
The colors are changed toward less hue on  
the vectorscope.  
The colors are changed toward more hue on  
the vectorscope.  
Off  
The “Material selection” items are not  
registered in the memories.  
The Hue is changed clockwise on the  
vectorscope.  
On  
The “Material selection” items are registered  
in the memories.  
CCW  
The Hue is changed counterclockwise on the  
vectorscope.  
When the [XPT DSBL] button is pressed, its indicator  
lights in red.  
The materials of the “Material selection” items registered  
in the buses are canceled.  
Pressed number keys blink in green while the operation  
switching is underway.  
When the operation switching has been completed, the  
pressed number key lights in amber.  
When the Effect item is changed from “Dissolve” to “Cut”  
while operation is being switched, the dissolve effect is  
released, and the images are switched to the images of  
the selected shot memory in an instant.  
When the PinP Bus item is changed from “Dissolve” to  
“Cut” while operation is being switched, the dissolve  
effect is released, and the PinP images are instantly  
switched to the PinP images of the selected shot  
memory.  
1-10-8. Setting effect dissolve  
(shot memory)  
Switching from the current image to the image or operation  
stored in the shot memory can be performed smoothly.  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Shot Memory menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Path sub menu.  
During the operation switching, the operation of the fader  
lever is canceled.  
During the operation switching, other stored operations  
cannot be recalled.  
When initiating PinP1/2 transitions, the switching process  
is not stored in the memory.  
Use [F2] to set the effect used for switching the images  
using the Effect item.  
Dissolve  
The images are switched using the dissolve  
effect.  
Cut  
The images are switched using the cut effect.  
The dissolve effect duration is set in the Effect  
Dissolve sub menu which is selected in the Time  
menu.  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-10-9. Editing event memory timelines  
Insertion or modification of the events can be edited on the  
timelines.  
Timeline editing flow  
Modifying registered event memories  
Timeline  
Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator.  
A timeline is a succession of events in the event memories  
which have been joined together on the time axis.  
[EVENT MEM] button  
Event points and edit points  
On a timeline, the position where an event has been  
registered is called the event point, and the event currently  
being edited is called the current event memory.  
When there is an edit point between one event point and  
another, the event point before the edit point serves as the  
current event memory.  
ヴラヰヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ヴヵヰンユ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
ユヷユワヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ンユ  
ヤモロロ  
 
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮヒ  
ュユロ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ユワヵユン  
ンユヷ  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮビ  
パバヒパ  
⿋⿋  
ユュリヵ  
(Event “n” in the figure below)  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
<Event points and edit points>  
Edit point  
Press the [RECALL] button to light its indicator, and use  
the P button and number keys (1 to 10) to select the  
event memory to be modified.  
Refer to “1-10-3. Recalling the operations stored in  
the memory (Recall)”.  
Event  
“n”  
Event  
“n”+1  
Event  
“n”+2  
Press the [EDIT] button to establish the editing mode.  
(At this point, the timeline of the selected event memory  
is copied into the work area.)  
Event duration and total duration  
The length of time as far as the next event is called the event  
duration.  
The total of all the event durations is called the total duration.  
The present point in time on the timeline is called the current  
time.  
The timeline appears on the built-in display, and events  
can be inserted or modified.  
Edit the timeline, and check what has been edited.  
Refer to the operations described later.  
Register the event memory which has been modified.  
Refer to “1-10-2. Storing the settings in the memory  
(Store)”.  
<How times are referred to>  
Total duration  
Event duration  
Creating a new timeline  
1s00f  
1s00f  
1s00f  
When this operation is performed, the timeline currently in the  
work area is deleted.  
If it is required, register it in the event memory.  
Event  
1
Event  
2
Event  
3
Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator.  
The event progresses  
in this direction.  
The event stops.  
Press the [EDIT] button to light its indicator, and press  
7.  
Current time  
Create the new timeline.  
Refer to the operations described later.  
Register the event memory which has just been created.  
Refer to “1-10-2. Storing the settings in the memory  
(Store)”.  
The timeline is edited in the work area.  
After editing is completed, be absolutely sure to register  
which has been edited.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Setting the playback method  
Setting the display mode  
Setting the playback mode  
Press the e button to display the Event Memory  
Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator.  
menu.  
[EVENT MEM] button  
Use [F1] to display the Timeline sub menu.  
ヴラヰヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ヴヵヰンユ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
ユヷユワヵ  
ヮユヮ  
ンユ  
ヤモロロ  
ヌ  
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮヒ  
Use [F2] to set the timeline display mode using the View  
ュユロ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ユワヵユン  
ンユヷ  
item.  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ヱロヶヨリワ  
ヮユヮビ  
パバヒパ  
⿋⿋  
ユュリヵ  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
Normal  
The timeline is displayed in a size which is  
one-half of the width of the built-in display  
screen.  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
Press the [EDIT] button to establish the editing mode.  
Wide  
The timeline is displayed in the full size  
(as large as the entire width) of the built-in  
display screen.  
Press the e button to display the Event Memory  
menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Run sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the playback mode using the Run Mode  
item.  
Repeat  
During normal playback, playback stops  
at the last event, and if the [TAKE ENTER]  
button is now pressed, the images are played  
back in the same direction.  
During reverse playback , playback stops  
at the first event, and if the [TAKE ENTER]  
button is now pressed, the images are played  
back in the same direction.  
Loop  
During normal playback, playback returns  
instantly from the last event to the first event,  
and what has been played back is repeated.  
During reverse playback , playback returns  
instantly from the first event to the last event,  
and what has been played back is repeated.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
Reverse playback cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Number key operations  
<Timeline displays (on the built-in display)>  
EMEM001  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
MEM-PVW  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
バ  
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
EVENT:02/06  
CURRENT TIME:00m01s00f  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ユワヵユン  
PGM  
ンユヷ  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
パバヒパ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
EVENT:02/06  
CURRENT TIME:00m01s00f  
EVENT:DURATION:00m01s00f TOTAL DURATION:00m07s00f  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
A green “” below the timeline indicates an event point.  
Creates a new timeline.  
A yellow “||” indicates that “PAUSE” has been set for an event  
point.  
7
Copies events.  
If an edit point is over an event point, “” or “||” for the event  
point is indicated in orange.  
An event is not copied if an edit point is not over the event.  
8
Pastes the copied events.  
If the edit point is an event point, the event is inserted after  
the event point.  
If the edit point is at any midway position in an event, the  
event is inserted at the edit point.  
When “CLIP” (Clip1, Clip2) has been registered in an event,  
9
” appears above the event point.  
Similarly, when “GPI-Out” (GPI-O1 to GPI-O19) has been  
registered in an event, “ ” appears above the event point.  
Inserts events.  
If the edit point is an event point, the event is inserted after  
the event point.  
If the edit point is at any midway position in an event, the  
event is inserted at the edit point.  
The timeline axis is indicated in blue from the start event to  
the end event.  
4
During playback, the part from the beginning to the current  
position is indicated in orange.  
Deletes events.  
Similarly, during reverse playback, the part from the end to  
the current position is indicated in orange.  
5
6
0
.
2
1
3
C
Modifies events.  
This key cannot be operated if the edit point is not over the  
event point.  
Moves to the start event point.  
Moves to the end event point.  
Moves to the next event point.  
Moves to the previous event point.  
Reverses the playback direction (event numbers are put in  
their reverse sequence).  
Undoes the editing operation of the event.  
When this button is operational, its indicator lights up.  
When the button is pressed, the operation performed last  
is canceled.  
Plays back events.  
When this button is operational, its indicator lights in amber.  
Each time it is pressed, operation is switched between  
playback and pause.  
During playback, its indicator blinks in green; during pause,  
it blinks in amber.  
T
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Pasting events (Paste)  
Inserting events (Insert)  
Copied events can be pasted.  
The current setting status can be inserted as an event after  
the current event memory.  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event point  
where the copied event is to be inserted.  
When an event is inserted, the numbers of the events after  
the current event memory are each moved up by one.  
To insert the copied event between one event point and  
another, play back the event to the place where the  
copied event is to be inserted, and stop the playback.  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event point  
(current event memory) which is to be inserted.  
To insert the event at a midway point of an event, play  
back the event to the place where the event is to be  
inserted, and stop the edit point.  
Press 9 to paste the copied event.  
To cancel the event pasting, press the C button.  
When the number of events on the timeline has  
reached 64, no further events can be inserted.  
When the edit point is over an event point, the copied  
event is inserted with the same duration as the  
current event memory.  
Operate the panel, and create the event.  
Press 4 to insert the created event.  
To cancel the event insertion, press the C button.  
When the number of events on the timeline has  
reached 64, no further events can be inserted.  
When the edit point is over the event point, the newly  
created event is inserted with the same duration as  
the current event memory.  
If the edit point is between one event point and  
another, the current event memory is split at the edit  
point position, and the copied event is inserted.  
If the edit point is between one event point and  
another, the current event memory is split at the edit  
point position, and the newly created event is inserted.  
Deleting events (Delete)  
Already registered events can be deleted.  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event point of  
Modifying events (Modify)  
the event to be deleted.  
Press 5 to delete the event.  
Already registered events can be modified.  
To cancel the event deletion, press the C button.  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event point of  
Even if the edit point is midway through an event, the  
current event memory will be deleted.  
the event to be modified.  
Operate the panel, and modify the event.  
Press 6 to enter what has been modified.  
Undoing what has been edited (Undo)  
To cancel the event modification, press the C button.  
The C button indicator lights immediately after events have  
been edited (inserted, modified or deleted).  
If this button is now pressed, the operation performed last is  
canceled.  
Copying events (Copy)  
Already registered events can be copied.  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event point of  
the event to be copied.  
Press 8 to copy the event.  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Setting the event duration  
Setting events using the menus  
The lengths of the events can be set.  
Registering marks  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event to be  
modified.  
Marks can be registered and events inserted at the event  
points.  
Press the e button to display the Event Memory  
Pause  
Clip playback  
GPI-Out output  
menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Event Duration sub menu.  
Use 0, 1, 2 and . to select the event where the  
mark is to be registered or the event inserted.  
Press the e button to display the Event Memory  
Use [F2] (minute item: minutes), [F3] (second item:  
seconds) and [F4] (frame item: frames) to set the event  
length.  
menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Mark sub menu.  
Press [F5] to enter the duration.  
To cancel what has been modified, press the C button.  
Setting the total duration  
Use [F2] (PAUSE item), [F3] (CLIP item) or [F4]  
(GPI-Out item) to select the item.  
The total length of all the events from start to end can be set.  
When the total duration is changed, the durations of the  
events contained in the event memories are re-calculated  
using the duration ratio prior to the change.  
However, the shortest duration of an event cannot be shorter  
than one frame.  
PAUSE  
When “On” is selected and the mark is  
registered in the event point, playback is  
paused at the mark position during event  
playback.  
“||” appears above the timeline.  
CLIP  
When “Clip1” or “Clip2” is selected and the  
mark is registered in the event point, the clip  
is played back at the mark position during  
event playback.  
Press the [EVENT MEM] button and light its indicator.  
Press the [RECALL] button to light its indicator, and use  
the P button and number keys (1 to 10) to select the  
event memory to be modified.  
” appears above the timeline.  
GPI-Out  
When a GPI output port from “GPI-O1”  
to “GPI-O19” is selected and the mark is  
registered in the event point, pulse signals  
are output from the GPI Output port at the  
mark position during event playback.  
Refer to “1-10-3. Recalling the operations stored in  
the memory (Recall)”.  
Press the e button to display the Event Memory  
” appears above the timeline.  
menu.  
For the Config menu GPI-Out Port 1/5  
sub menu to GPI-Out Port 5/5 sub menu   
Assign item, check that the selected GPI  
output port is set to “Event MEM”.  
Use [F1] to display the Total Duration sub menu.  
Press 6 to register the mark.  
In addition, press 4 to insert the event.  
To cancel the mark registration or event insertion, press  
the C button.  
Use [F2] (minute item: minutes), [F3] (second item:  
seconds) and [F4] (frame item: frames) to set the event  
length.  
Press [F5] to enter the duration.  
If no more events can be contained in the total duration  
which already has many events and which has been  
changed, the number of frames will be forcibly adjusted.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F5] to select the effect when the colors are  
switched using the Hue Path item.  
Setting the event switching effect (Path)  
Switching from one event to another (bus switching) can be  
accomplished smoothly.  
The following hues are targeted.  
Colors of the color background  
Colors of the borders  
Colors of the edges  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Event Memory menu.  
Colors of the fill matte  
Use [F1] to display the Path sub menu.  
Short  
Long  
CW  
The colors are changed toward less hue on  
the vectorscope.  
The colors are changed toward more hue on  
the vectorscope.  
The Hue is changed clockwise on the  
vectorscope.  
Use [F2] to set the effect to be used for switching  
images using the Effect item.  
CCW  
Step  
The Hue is changed counterclockwise on the  
vectorscope.  
Dissolve  
The images are switched using the dissolve  
effect.  
The color changes are updated when an  
event is passed through.  
Cut  
The images are switched using the cut effect.  
The dissolve effect duration is set in the Effect  
Dissolve sub menu which is selected on the Time  
menu.  
Use [F3] to set the PinP bus transition using the PinP  
Bus item.  
Dissolve  
The PinP bus images are switched using the  
dissolve effect.  
Cut  
The PinP bus images are switched using the  
cut effect.  
Use [F4] to select the path to be used for switching the  
images using the Trans Path item.  
The following transitions are targeted.  
Width of the borders  
Soft effect of the borders  
Colors of the borders  
Positions of the images  
Trimming values  
Linear  
The switching from one image to another is  
interpolated linearly.  
Step  
The parameters are updated when the events  
are passed through.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-10-10. Registering memories (Register)  
Shot memories and event memories can be registered.  
Information on the memories is displayed in the status area of  
the built-in display, and names can be changed or copied.  
Press the e button to light its indicator, and display the  
Shot Memory menu (or Event Memory menu).  
The information of the memories is now displayed in the  
status area of the built-in display.  
Use [F1] to display the Register sub menu.  
Changing the names of the memories  
The names (up to 16 characters) of the memories can be  
changed.  
On the Register sub menu, use [F2] to select the page  
number of the registered memories using the Page item.  
Use [F3] to select the memory number using the No.  
item.  
Use [F4] to display the keyboard screen.  
Use [F1] to [F3] to input the name, and press [F4].  
To cancel the name which has been input and close the  
keyboard screen, press [F5].  
Refer to “2-2-2. Keyboard screen operations”  
(<Basics> Operating Instructions).  
Copying memories  
Memories can be copied.  
To register a copied memory, select a number which has not  
been registered for any other memory.  
On the Register sub menu, use [F2] to select the page  
number of the registered memories using the Page item.  
Use [F3] to select the memory number using the No.  
item.  
Use [F5] to select the number of the memory to which  
the memory will be copied, and press [F5].  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-11. Video memories  
This unit can be used to store still image memories (Still) and moving image memories (Clip), each in two channels.  
 Images with key signals can be stored in the video memories (still images and moving images).  
 Images of up to 600 frames (20 seconds with the 59.94i format) can be stored in the moving image memories per channel in  
the standard mode, and images up to 300 frames (10 seconds with the 59.94i format) can be stored in the high-image-quality  
mode.  
 The size of the images (number of seconds) which can be stored depends on the system format (frame rate).  
 The video memory data can be stored onto, and read out from, memory cards.  
There are some differences in the operations which can be performed depending on whether the system version of the  
model is V2.00.00 and up or under V2.00.00.  
Models whose system version is below V2.00.00  
Current status  
Video memory operation  
Clip1  
Playback  
Clip2  
Recording  
Stop  
Recording  
Playback  
Stop  
Still1  
Still2  
Recording  
Recording  
Recording  
Playback  
Stop  
Clip1  
Clip2  
Recording  
Playback  
Stop  
: Valid  
—: Invalid  
Models whose system version is V2.00.00 and up  
Current status  
Video memory operation  
Clip1  
Playback  
Clip2  
Recording  
Stop  
Recording  
Playback  
Stop  
Still1  
Still2  
Recording  
Recording  
Recording  
Playback  
Stop  
Clip1  
Clip2  
Recording  
Playback  
Stop  
: Valid  
—: Invalid  
Video memory input/output  
<Image systems of the video memories>  
The image input materials can be selected from the output  
signals of the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4).  
The key materials can be input from the KeyOut output  
signals.  
Video  
Key  
Video  
AUX1 to AUX4:  
Selected using the menu  
Key  
Clip1  
Clip2  
Input materials  
Still1  
Still2  
Fill  
KeyOut  
KEYER  
Source  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F5] to set the review display using the Review item.  
1-11-1. Recording still images (Still)  
On  
After the images have been recorded, the  
images of the video memory recorded in the  
AUX bus are displayed (for 2 seconds or so).  
The next images can be recorded even  
during review display.  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
Video Memory menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory3 sub menu.  
Off  
The review display is not shown.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.  
Use [F5] to select “Off” using the Rec Lock item.  
When the unit’s power has been turned back on  
after it was turned off, the Rec Lock item setting is  
restored to “On”.  
As soon as [F3] (Rec) is pressed, the still images are  
recorded.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
Use [F2] to select “Still1” or “Still2” using the Select item.  
If the [VMEM] button on the right of the number keys  
is pressed and the video memory operation mode has  
been established, the operation of this button is linked  
with the [XPT/DSBL] button among the number keys.  
When the recording of the still images is completed,  
thumbnails of the still images are displayed in the  
thumbnail screen.  
Use [F1] to display the Rec1 sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the images to appear on the built-in  
display using the Preview item.  
On  
The image appearing on the built-in display is  
forcibly switched to the image to be recorded  
(AUX1 to AUX4 selected using the V Source  
item) instead of the material selected by the  
DISP bus.  
Off  
The image source selected by the DISP bus  
is displayed as a preview.  
Use [F3] to set the image to be recorded in the video  
memory using the V Source item.  
AUX1 to  
AUX4  
The output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1  
to AUX4) are recorded as the material.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F5] to set the review display using the Review item.  
1-11-2. Recording moving images (Clip)  
On  
After the images have been recorded, the  
images of the video memory recorded in the  
AUX bus are displayed (for 2 seconds or so).  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
Video Memory menu.  
Off  
The review display is not shown.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory3 sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Rec2 sub menu.  
Use [F5] to select “Off” using the Rec Lock item.  
When the unit’s power has been turned back on  
after it was turned off, the Rec Lock item setting is  
restored to “On”.  
Use [F2] to select the recording repeat setting using the  
Loop item.  
On  
The recording of the images is continued until  
the stop operation is performed.  
If either of the following operations is  
performed while recording is in progress, the  
images are recorded up to the last frame,  
after which recording stops.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.  
When “Off” is selected as the Loop item  
setting.  
When [Stop] ([F5] of Video Memory sub  
menu) is pressed.  
Use [F2] to select “Clip1” or “Clip2” using the Select  
item.  
Use [F1] to display the Rec1 sub menu.  
Off  
Images are recorded up to the maximum  
recording time (set using the Limit items),  
after which recording stops automatically.  
Use [F3] to set the quality of the images to be recorded  
Use [F2] to set the images to appear on the built-in  
using the Quality item.  
display using the Preview item.  
Standard  
Standard image quality  
Maximum 600 frames  
(20 seconds with 59.94i format)  
On  
The image appearing on the built-in display is  
forcibly switched to the image to be recorded  
(AUX1 to AUX4 selected using the V Source  
item) instead of the material selected by the  
DISP bus.  
High  
High image quality  
Maximum 300 frames  
(10 seconds with 59.94i format)  
Off  
The image source selected by the DISP bus  
is displayed as a preview.  
Use [F4] to set the maximum recording time using the  
Limit item.  
Use [F3] to set the image to be recorded in the video  
memory using the V Source item.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.  
AUX1 to  
AUX4  
The output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1  
to AUX4) are recorded as the material.  
As soon as [F3] (Rec) is pressed, the recording of the  
moving images starts.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
When [F5] (Stop) is pressed, the recording of the  
1-11-3. Saving Images in Flash Memory  
moving images is stopped.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model with a  
system version of below V2.00.00.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
Data for images stored in the video memory can be retained  
even when the power is turned off, by saving them in the flash  
memory area.  
Whether to automatically save the image data stored in the  
video memory when the data is transferred from the AUX bus  
or to manually save them must be set.  
Care must be taken when selecting manual saving, as image  
data stored in the video memory will be lost if the power is  
turned off before the saving operation is completed.  
If the [VMEM] button on the right of the number keys  
is pressed and the video memory operation mode has  
been established, the operation of this button is linked  
with the P button among the number keys.  
Thumbnails of moving images are displayed on the  
thumbnail screen.  
While the thumbnails are displayed, the following  
information is also displayed on the thumbnail screen.  
Current playback position (time), IN point position,  
OUT point position  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
Video Memory menu.  
With the moving images on which the key signals  
are recorded, a yellow “” mark is displayed for the  
thumbnail icons.  
Use [F1] to display the Memory sub menu.  
The recording time is displayed in the Total Time item  
of the Video Memory3 sub menu.  
Also, “On” is displayed for the Key item when the key  
signals have been recorded.  
Use [F2] to select the saving method using the Mode  
item.  
Auto  
Automatic saving  
Manual saving  
Manual  
Use [F3] to select the video memory for saving data in  
the flash memory area using the Select item.  
When “All” has been selected, all the video memories  
are saved.  
Press the [F5] (Save) to save data in the flash memory  
area.  
The [F5] (Save) becomes enabled when “Manual” is  
selected in the Mode item.  
When, in the case of the settings below, [Stop] ([F5]  
of the Video Memory sub menu) is pressed while  
video memory recording is in progress, the video  
memories are saved in the flash memory area  
immediately after [Stop] has been pressed.  
Memory sub menu  
“Mode” item: “Auto”  
Rec2 sub menu  
“Loop” item: “On”  
However, if the power is cut off during recording,  
the video memories will not be saved in the flash  
memory area.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F2] and [F3] to set the control button used for  
1-11-4. Playing back moving images (Clip)  
playing back moving images in tandem with the  
transition operation.  
Establishing the playback mode  
Use [F2] (Clip1 item) to set the Clip1 playback start  
button, and use [F3] (Clip2 item) to set the Clip2  
playback start button.  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
Video Memory menu.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
Use [F1] to display the Clip1 Play Mode sub menu (or  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
Clip2 Play Mode sub menu).  
Off  
Playback is not performed in tandem with the  
transition operation.  
KEY ON  
The playback of the moving images is started  
in tandem with the operation of the [KEY ON]  
button.  
Use [F2] to select the playback mode using the Mode  
item.  
PinP1 ON  
PinP2 ON  
DSK ON  
FTB ON  
The playback of the moving images is started  
in tandem with the operation of the [PinP1  
ON] button.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
The playback of the moving images is started  
in tandem with the operation of the [PinP2  
ON] button.  
Lead  
Operation returns to the start frame after  
playback.  
The playback of the moving images is started  
in tandem with the operation of the [DSK ON]  
button.  
Last  
Operation stops at the end frame after  
playback.  
The playback of the moving images is started  
in tandem with the operation of the [FTB ON]  
button.  
Loop  
The end frame and start frame are joined  
together and played back repeatedly.  
Use [F3] to select reverse playback using the Reverse  
item.  
Playing back the moving images  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
Video Memory menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory1 sub menu.  
On  
The moving images are played back in the  
reverse direction.  
Off  
The moving images are played back in the  
forward direction.  
Use [F2] to select Clip1 or Clip2 using the Select item.  
When the [VMEM] button on the right of the number  
key is pressed and the video memory operation mode  
has been established, the operation of this button is  
linked with the 3 button among the number keys.  
When [F4] (Play) is pressed, playback of the moving  
images is started.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
Use [F4] to select the speed for variable speed playback  
using the Variable item.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
Speeds which can be selected:  
1/8, 1/4, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8  
When the [VMEM] button on the right of the number  
key is pressed and the video memory operation mode  
has been established, the operation of this button  
is linked with the [TAKE/ENTER] button among the  
number keys.  
The current playback position (time) is displayed for  
the Current Time item on the Video Memory3 sub  
menu.  
Use [F5] to select the image when operation is stopped  
using the Freeze item.  
Frame  
Field  
A frame image is played back.  
A field image is played back.  
Use [F1] to display the Trans Sync sub menu.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Moving to the first frame or last frame  
Operations performed using the number keys  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
Video Memory menu.  
These operations cannot be performed using the  
number keys with models whose system version is below  
V2.00.00.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Memory2 sub menu.  
ヹヱヵ  
ュヴャロ  
ヮユワヶ  
リワヱヶヵ  
ワユヸ  
ヤヰヱヺ  
ヱモヴヵユ  
When [F2] (LEAD) is pressed, the current position is  
moved to the first (head) frame; conversely, when [F3]  
(LAST) is pressed, the current position is moved to the  
last frame.  
ヴヵリロロチヒ  
ヴヵリロロチビ  
ヵンリヮチリワ  
ンユヤ  
バ  
ヷヮユヮ  
ヱモヨユ  
リワヴ  
ュユロ  
ヮヰュ  
ヤロリヱチヒ  
ヤロリヱチビ  
ヵンリヮチヰヶヵ  
ヴヵヰヱ  
When the [VMEM] button located on the right of  
the number keys is pressed and the video memory  
operation mode has been established, the operation  
ャレヨュ  
ヱモヵヵ  
ンユヷ  
ヵモレユ  
ユワヵユン  
ンユヷ  
レユヺ  
ヱモヵヵ  
パバヒパ  
of number keys 0 and . become linked.  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヶワュヰ  
⿋⿋  
⿍⿍  
ヵンリヮチヰョョ  
ヱロモヺ  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
ヮユヮヰンヺチバチヸリヱユチヱモヵヵユンワチバチヒパチレユヺ  
These operations cannot be performed using the  
number keys with models whose system version is  
below V2.00.00.  
Selects Still1 as the operation target.  
Selects Still2 as the operation target.  
Selects Clip1 as the operation target.  
Selects Clip2 as the operation target.  
Sets the trimming IN point.  
7
8
4
5
9
6
C
1
2
3
0
.
Trimming moving images  
The position where the playback of the moving images is to  
start (IN point) and the position when it is to end (OUT point)  
can be set.  
Press the [VMEM] button on the right of the number  
keys to establish the video memory operation mode.  
Sets the trimming OUT point.  
Use the number keys to stop the moving images at the  
position where the images are to be trimmed (IN point  
or OUT point).  
Releases the trimming settings.  
Trim the moving images by operating the buttons below.  
Plays back the moving images one frame at a time in  
the reverse direction.  
Sets the trimming IN point.  
9
Plays back the moving images one frame at a time in  
the forward direction.  
Sets the trimming OUT point.  
6
Sets the playback direction to reverse.  
(Button indicator lights: reverse direction; indicator off:  
forward direction)  
Releases the trimming settings.  
C
Transfers to the start frame of the moving images, and  
stops.  
The trimmed moving images are played back from the IN  
point to the OUT point, however you can move anywhere  
in the section from the start point to the end point of the  
recorded moving images by operating 1, 2, 0 and  
..  
Transfers to the end frame of the moving images, and  
stops.  
Plays back the moving images.  
Trimming can be set and released over and over again  
until the moving images are stored on the memory card.  
When the moving images are saved on an memory card,  
only the trimmed parts are saved and the parts no longer  
required are deleted.  
T
X
P
Starts recording the moving images.  
Stops the recording or playback of the moving images.  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Displaying thumbnails  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model with a  
system version of below V2.00.00.  
 When the [VMEM] button located on the right of the  
number keys is pressed and the video memory operation  
mode has been established, thumbnails of the images  
registered in the video memories (Still1, Still2, Clip1, Clip2)  
can be shown on the built-in display.  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-12. Memory card  
The unit’s video memory data and setup data can be stored  
on memory card.  
All file (All):  
All the following data is stored.  
Conversely, this data can be loaded from the memory card to  
the unit.  
Video memory data, shot memory data, event memory data,  
setup data  
Furthermore, it is possible to upgrade the unit’s software.  
Plug-in software (Plug-in):  
The plug-in software data is loaded.  
It cannot be stored.  
Video memory (still image data: Still1, Still2):  
<File formats supported>  
Bitmap (bmp), JPEG (jpg), TARGA (tga), TIFF (tif), GIF (gif),  
PNG (png)  
Software for upgrading (Upgrade):  
The software for upgrading is loaded.  
This software can be obtained from “Service and Support”  
on the home page whose address is provided below:  
<Applicable sizes>  
HD/1080i:  
19201080  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/en/  
HD/1080PsF:19201080  
For the upgrade procedure, follow the steps in the  
directions which are contained in the download file.  
HD/720p:  
SD/NTSC:  
SD/PAL:  
1280720  
720487  
720576  
Log file (Log):  
Log files stored in the unit can be saved.  
The size of images is converted automatically if it does  
not match any of the “applicable sizes”.  
(The aspect ratio is not maintained. The enlargement or  
reduction ratio in the top-bottom and left-right directions  
will differ.)  
The pixels of images in SD format are not square, so  
the aspect ratio will be different when the images are  
displayed on the computer and when they are imported  
into video memory (with NTSC format, they will be  
vertically long).  
Concerning memory cards  
Memory cards used with the unit should conform to SD or  
SDHC standards.  
Be sure to format cards using the unit.  
Memory cards with the following capacity can be used for  
the unit.  
SDXC memory cards are not available for this product.  
To keep the images true to their actual proportions, make  
sure the original size is 720540 pixels. If the images  
are in NTSC format, use images shrunk to 720487  
pixels. If the images are in PAL format, use images  
enlarged to 720576 pixels.  
SD (from 8 MB to 2 GB)  
SDHC (from 4 GB to 32 GB)  
For the latest information not available in the Operating  
Instructions, visit the following Web sites.  
http://pro-av.panasonic.net/  
Video memories (moving image data: Clip1, Clip2):  
This is the original format of the unit.  
 Memory cards must not be used or stored in an  
environment where they may be  
Data is stored in and read from these memories.  
• Exposed to high temperatures/humidities;  
• Exposed to water droplets; or  
• Electrically charged.  
Shot memory data (Shot):  
Data is stored in and read from these memories.  
Event memory data (Event):  
Data is stored in and read from these memories.  
Setup data (Set Up):  
The “setup data” refers to all the data stored in the unit with  
the exception of the date, time and network settings and of  
the still image data. The extension used for the setup data  
files is “h41”.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
The data is stored in the following folders on the memory card.  
When data is to be loaded, first store the data in the respective folders, and then load the files.  
<Data folder configuration>  
Data type  
SELECT item  
Storage folder  
“HS400\IMAGE”  
Extension  
Video memory  
Still image data  
Still1, Still2  
bmp, jpg, tga, tif, gif, png  
Video memory  
Clip1, Clip2  
“HS400\CLIP”  
clp, bmp  
Moving image data  
Shot memory data  
Event memory data  
Setup data  
Shot  
Event  
Set Up  
All  
“HS410\SHOT”  
“HS410\EVENT”  
“HS410\SYSTEM”  
“HS410\ALL”  
s41  
e41  
h41  
All file  
Plug-in software  
Software for upgrading  
Log file  
Plug-in  
Upgrade  
Log  
“HS410\PLUGIN”  
“HS410\SYSTEM”  
“HS410\LOG”  
plg  
41d  
log  
: In the case of “All file”, folders with the names specified using the File Name item are created at the hierarchical level under the “ALL”  
folder, and the data is stored inside the folders which have been created.  
The data is stored under the following filenames.  
Still1.***, Still2.***, Clip1.clp, Clip2.clp, Shot.s41, Event.e41, Setup.h41  
Memory card handling precautions  
Do NOT eject the memory card while the memory card access LED is lit.  
When an memory card is ejected while the memory card access LED is lit, the transition may be temporarily suspended.  
In addition, the data stored on the memory card may be lost.  
The data stored on memory cards may be lost as a result of misplacing the cards or performing erroneous operations, for  
instance. It is recommended that valuable data be stored on a computer or other device.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-12-1. Initializing the memory cards  
1-12-2. Saving data on memory cards  
Before an memory card is used in this unit, the card must be  
initialized by the unit without fail.  
Insert the memory card which has been initialized by  
the unit, into the memory card slot.  
By initializing the memory card formats (in compliance with  
the SD standard) it creates the dedicated directory.  
(All files saved on the memory card will be erased.)  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
SD Card menu.  
Use [F1] to display the File1 sub menu.  
Insert the memory card into the unit’s memory card slot.  
Press the v button to light its indicator, and display the  
SD Card menu.  
Use [F2] to select “Save” using the Mode item, and then  
Use [F1] to display the File1 sub menu.  
press the [F2].  
Use [F3] to select the data which is to be stored on the  
memory card using the Save Type item.  
The filename provided automatically is displayed in the  
File Name item.  
Use [F2] to select “Init” using the Mode item, and then  
press the [F2].  
Filenames are provided automatically using the running  
number as shown below.  
If the memory card has not been inserted, “No Card” will  
appear at the Mode item.  
<Saving the video memories, shot memory data, Event  
memory data and setup data>  
Press the [F1] (OK) to initialize the card.  
hs001.xxx to hs100.xxx  
Before using a memory card in this unit, initialize it.  
This unit also supports SDHC memory cards.  
Memory cards can be initialized no matter whether they  
are SD or SDHC memory cards.  
When changing a filename, press [F4] to open the  
keyboard screen, input the filename, and close the  
keyboard screen.  
Refer to “2-2-2. Keyboard screen operations”  
(<Basics> Operating Instructions).  
<Saving the all files and log files>  
hs001 to hs100  
The name of the folder where the all files and log files  
are saved serves as the filenames of the all files and  
log files.  
The filenames of the all files and log files cannot be  
changed on the keyboard screen.  
If the [F5] (Save) is now pressed, the file is stored on  
the memory card.  
For the destinations where the data is stored, refer to  
<Data folder configuration>.  
When storing video memory still images, the file format  
can be selected.  
On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the File2 sub  
menu, and select the format of the file to be used when  
storing the data on the memory card using the Format  
item.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
Use [F2] to select the name of the file to be loaded  
using the SELECT FILE item.  
1-12-3. Loading data from memory cards  
If the name of the file to be loaded consists of more  
than 8 characters, a shortened version of the filename  
will be displayed.  
Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into  
the memory card slot.  
Load the file after its data has been stored in the each  
folder.  
Data stored in other folders will not be recognized by  
the unit.  
When “Plug-in” has been selected using [F1]  
(SELECT item), use [F3] to select the index number  
(1 to 10) of the files to be loaded.  
Up to 100 files can be loaded from one folder.  
The following alphanumerics and symbols can be  
used as the characters for filenames (see below).  
Files using other characters will not be displayed by  
the unit.  
For the destinations where the data is stored, refer to  
<Data folder configuration>.  
On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the File1 sub  
menu.  
<Characters which can be used for filenames>  
A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, Space, ! # $ % & ' ( ) - . @ ^ _ ` { }  
Use [F2] to select “Load” using the Mode item, and then  
press the [F2].  
Use [F4] to load the file.  
When [F2] is pressed, the file selection screen is  
displayed.  
Changing the sort mode  
<Example of what appears on the file selection screen>  
The way in which the file list displayed on the file selection  
screen is arranged can be specified.  
On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the File2 sub  
menu.  
Use [F2] to select the sort mode for the file selection  
screen using the Sort item.  
Newest  
Oldest  
Name  
The files are arranged in sequence  
starting with the file having the most recent  
registration date and time.  
The files are arranged in sequence starting  
with the file having the oldest registration  
date and time.  
Use [F1] to select the type of file to be loaded using the  
SELECT item.  
Correlation between [F1] (for selecting a setting  
using the SELECT item) and [F3] on the file  
selection screen  
The files are arranged in filename sequence.  
[F1]  
[F3]  
Settings selected  
Displays and function  
using SELECT item  
Still1, Still2,  
Clip1, Clip2  
F3: LIST VIEW  
Using the [F3], it is possible to switch  
the screen display between  
“List (list files)” and “Thumbnail  
(display thumbnails)”.  
Shot, Event, Set Up, F3:  
All, Upgrade  
The [F3] cannot be operated.  
On the screen, the list of files is  
displayed.  
Plug-in  
F3: INDEX  
Using the [F3], it is possible to select  
the index number (1 to 10) of the files  
to be loaded.  
On the screen, the list of files is  
displayed.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
The display cannot be switched to “Thumbnail” with a  
model whose system version is below V2.00.00.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-12-4. Deleting files on memory cards  
1-12-5. Displaying the memory card  
information  
Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into  
the memory card slot.  
Insert the memory card on which the data is stored into  
the memory card slot.  
On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the File1 sub  
menu.  
On the SD Card menu, use [F1] to display the  
Card Information sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select “Delete” using the Mode item, and  
then press the [F2].  
Free Space  
The memory card’s total memory and  
remaining free space are displayed in  
megabyte units (MB).  
When [F2] is pressed, the file selection screen is  
displayed.  
(Free space/card’s total memory)  
<Example of what appears on the file selection screen>  
Use [F1] to select the type of file to be deleted using the  
SELECT item.  
If the name of the file to be loaded consists of more  
than 8 characters, a shortened version of the filename  
will be displayed.  
Use [F2] to select the name of the file to be deleted  
using the SELECT FILE item.  
Use [F4] to delete the file.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-13. Waveform monitor settings  
VECTOR (vectorscope) settings  
WFM (waveform monitor) settings  
Press the [WFM/VECT] button among the display mode  
Press the [WFM/VECT] button among the display mode  
buttons to display the waveform monitor on the built-in  
display.  
buttons to display the vectorscope on the built-in display.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Vector sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the WFM sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the color bar reference marker using  
the Bar Target item.  
Use [F2] to select the method to be used to display the  
signal waveforms using the Style item.  
75%  
The 75% color bar reference marker is  
displayed.  
Parade  
The signal waveforms are arranged and  
displayed.  
100%  
The 100% color bar reference marker is  
displayed.  
Overlay  
The signal waveforms are superimposed onto  
each other and displayed.  
Use [F3] to select the signals whose waveforms are to  
be displayed using the Mode item.  
YPbPr  
RGB  
Y
Waveforms of the Y, PB and PR signals are  
displayed.  
Waveforms of the R, G and B signals are  
displayed.  
Waveforms of the Y signal only are displayed.  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Basic operations  
1-14. Setting the status display  
Displaying the audio status  
When the menu display mode has been set to “1 line of menu  
display and full-screen image display”, the audio status of the  
signals selected by the DISP bus is displayed on the WFM or  
VECTOR screen.  
When SDI input signals are selected:  
The status of the embedded audio is displayed.  
When PGM, PVW, MV or AUX signals are selected:  
When “ON” has been selected as the ancillary data setting,  
the status of the embedded audio is displayed.  
-STATUS-  
<Format>  
System formats used by the unit  
Display System format  
1080/59i  
1080/23PsF  
1080/59.94i  
720/59.94p  
1080/24PsF  
1080/23.98PsF  
480/59.94i  
1080/50i  
720/59p  
<GROUP>  
Audio group  
1080/24PsF  
1080/23PsF  
480/59i  
1,2,3,4  
<RATE>  
Audio rate  
1080/50i  
720/50p  
44.1KHz  
720/50p  
576/50i  
576/50i  
<ACT>  
Audio channels  
1,2,3,4  
5,6,7,8  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1. Input signal settings  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8 are SDI signal inputs.  
DVI IN is DVI-D signal input.  
IN A1, IN A2, IN B1 and IN B2 can be set only when one of the following option boards has been connected.  
AV-HS04M1 (SDI Input Board)  
AV-HS04M2 (Analog Input Board)  
AV-HS04M3 (DVI Input Board)  
AV-HS04M6 (Analog Composite Input Board)  
AV-HS04M8 (Full-HD DVI Input Board)  
Before setting the input signals, first select the input signal to be set using the Input sub menu.  
Press the i button to light its indicator, and display the Input menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Input sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the input signals using the Select item.  
The menu display is switched in accordance with the input signals which have been selected.  
The menu title is set to “MENU: Input (signal type)/input connector (material name)”.  
Signal type  
SDI, Analog, DVI, Composite  
Material name  
Material name set in “2-1-5. Setting the material  
names”.  
<Example of menu (SDI)>  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
<List of settings by input signal>  
Setting menu and numbers of sections in this manual  
Up  
Converter  
Input connector  
FS  
Mode  
2-1-2  
Delay  
2-1-3  
Freeze  
2-1-4  
Name  
2-1-5  
2-1-1  
2-1-6  
Only  
Dot by Dot  
selectable  
SDI IN1 to  
SDI IN4  
Standard  
SDI IN5,  
SDI IN6  
SDI input 8 lines  
SDI IN7,  
SDI IN8  
Standard  
DVI-D input 1 line  
DVI IN  
AV-HS04M1  
SDI input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M2  
Analog component input  
2 lines  
Option slot  
IN A1, IN A2,  
IN B1, IN B2  
AV-HS04M3  
DVI-I input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M6  
Analog composite input  
2 lines  
AV-HS04M8  
DVI-D input 2 lines  
Setting menu and numbers of sections in this manual  
Video  
Process  
(SDI)  
Video  
Process  
(Composite)  
DVI Input  
(Digital)  
DVI Input  
(Analog)  
Input connector  
Gain  
2-1-7  
2-1-8  
2-1-9  
2-1-10  
2-1-10  
SDI IN1 to  
SDI IN4  
Standard  
SDI input 8 lines  
SDI IN5,  
SDI IN6  
SDI IN7,  
SDI IN8  
Standard  
DVI-D input 1 line  
DVI IN  
AV-HS04M1  
SDI input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M2  
Analog component input  
2 lines  
Option slot  
IN A1, IN A2,  
IN B1, IN B2  
AV-HS04M3  
DVI-I input 2 lines  
AV-HS04M6  
Analog composite input  
2 lines  
AV-HS04M8  
DVI-D input 2 lines  
: Can be set.  
—: Cannot be set.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-1. Setting the frame synchronizer  
The frame synchronizer can be set to On or Off for each input.  
The DVI input frame synchronizer is permanently On.  
It cannot be set from On to Off or vice versa.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the FS sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set On or Off for the frame synchronizer  
using the FS item.  
If the output signal phase is set to 0H, Off cannot be  
selected as the FS item setting.  
AVDL function is active while the frame synchronizer  
function is set to Off.  
The AVDL function automatically adjusts the input image  
signal phase to the horizontal synchronization reference  
signal phase.  
For details, refer to “2-4. Adjusting the output signal phase”.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-2. Setting the input mode  
The mode can be set for each input only when HD has been selected as the system format.  
When SD is selected as the system format, the input mode is always the same as Normal.  
On the FS sub menu, use [F3] to set the input mode using the Mode item.  
Normal  
Input signals in conformity with the system format take effect.  
Dot by Dot  
When SD signals with the same frame rate as the system format have been input, they are input on a dot by dot (1  
magnification) basis with no up-conversion. (This setting is only possible when the system format is 1080i.)  
In this mode, there is minimal deterioration in the image quality and, as such, the mode is used to combine SD format  
material using the PinP function.  
Up Convert  
Auto  
When SD signals with the same frame rate as the system format have been input, they are up-converted.  
Input signals in conformity with the system format take effect.  
Furthermore, if SD signals with the same frame rate as the system format are input when HD is selected as the system  
format, they are up-converted.  
In the Auto mode, the images may be disturbed when the input signals are switched.  
<List of input modes supported>  
Input  
1080/  
50i  
System  
Mode  
480/  
59.94i  
576/  
50i  
1080/  
59.94i  
1080/  
24PsF  
1080/  
23.98PsF  
720/  
59.94p  
720/  
50p  
SD 480/59.94i  
576/50i  
HD 1080/59.94i  
Normal  
Dot by Dot  
Up Convert  
Auto  
(Up Convert)  
1080/50i  
Normal  
Dot by Dot  
Up Convert  
Auto  
(Up Convert)  
1080/24PsF  
Normal  
Dot by Dot  
Up Convert  
Auto  
1080/23.98PsF  
Normal  
Dot by Dot  
Up Convert  
Auto  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
Normal  
Up Convert  
Auto  
(Up Convert)  
Normal  
Up Convert  
Auto  
(Up Convert)  
denotes a black screen.  
The Up Convert mode or Auto mode cannot be selected for inputs 1 to 4.  
If Dot by Dot, Up Convert or Auto mode is selected, the frame synchronizer will be turned on.  
The input mode cannot be changed when freeze is set to on.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
Press the [F3] to freeze the input image or cancel the  
2-1-3. Setting the delay amount  
The input signals can be delayed.  
 The delay can be applied only to the SDI IN7 and SDI IN8  
input signals.  
freeze.  
If the [F3] is pressed while the display is “Off”, the video  
signal is frozen, and the display is set to “On”.  
If the [F3] is pressed while the display is “On”, the video  
signal freezing is canceled, and the display is set to  
“Off”.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
The “F” mark appears in front of the name of the  
material when the signals set for output of multi view  
displays are frozen.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the FS sub menu.  
When the unit is used with the frame synchronizer  
function OFF, the output images may be disturbed when  
freezing is executed, but the frozen images will not be  
adversely affected.  
Use [F4] to set the delay amount using the Delay item.  
If, when the switcher is used with the frame synchronizer  
function at OFF, On” is set as the freeze setting, the  
frame synchronizer function will be automatically  
switched to ON.  
2-1-4. Freezing the input signals  
The input signals can be frozen and used.  
While signals are frozen, the tally signals of the corresponding  
input will not be output.  
2-1-5. Setting the material names  
Material names can be given to the input signals.  
These names can be selected from the default settings or  
user settings.  
Setting freeze  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the Freeze sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Name sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the freeze method using the Select  
item.  
Use [F2] to select the type of material names using the  
Frame  
Field  
The images are frozen frame by frame.  
Type item.  
The images are frozen field by field.  
This is used to freeze moving images.  
With interlace signals, however, diagonal  
lines and moving parts appear jagged.  
Default  
(default  
settings)  
Select the material names from the following:  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8, DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2,  
IN-B1 and IN-B2.  
User  
(user  
The material names are set using up to 7  
characters.  
Frame or Field can also be selected while an image is  
frozen.  
settings)  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
Use [F4] to set the extent of the edge sharpness for the  
2-1-6. Setting the up-converter  
images using the Sharp item.  
Select the settings for SDI IN5 to SDI IN8, as well as for the  
up-converter that is built into the option boards listed below:  
1
Not sharp edges  
AV-HS04M1 (SDI Input Board)  
AV-HS04M2 (Analog Input Board)  
AV-HS04M6 (Analog Composite Input Board)  
3
Standard  
5
Very sharp edges  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Use [F5] to adjust the input image size (100 % to  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
110 %).  
Use [F1] to display the Up Converter1 sub menu.  
Fine-tuning of image positions  
Fine-tuning of image positions is performed when “Edge  
Crop” is selected for the scaling method.  
Use [F2] to select the scaling system using the Scale  
item.  
Use [F1] to display the Up Converter2 sub menu.  
Squeeze  
The image is enlarged both horizontally and  
vertically to fill the entire screen.  
Edge Crop  
The aspect ratio of the image is maintained,  
the image size is increased in accordance  
with the vertical resolution, and black bands  
are added at the left and right.  
Use [F2] to select the image position using the Edge  
Crop Pos item.  
Letter Box  
The aspect ratio of the image is maintained,  
the image size is increased in accordance  
with the horizontal resolution, and the image  
is cropped at the top and bottom.  
Center  
Right  
Left  
The image is positioned at the center, and  
black images are added at the left and right.  
The image is positioned at the right, and a  
black image is added at the left.  
Input image  
Squeeze  
The image is positioned at the left, and a  
black image is added at the right.  
Setting the gamut limiter  
Edge Crop  
Letter Box  
On the Up Converter2 sub menu, use [F4] to set the  
color range of the input signals using the Limiter item.  
Use [F3] to set the image movement detection  
Off  
The color range is not restricted.  
sensitivity using the Move Detect item.  
108  
The amplitude level of the colors (R, G and  
B) is restricted to 0 % - 108 %.  
1
Toward still images  
104  
100  
The amplitude level of the colors (R, G and  
B) is restricted to 0 % - 104 %.  
3
Standard  
The amplitude level of the colors (R, G and  
B) is restricted to 0 % - 100 %.  
5
Toward moving images  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-7. Setting the video process function  
The video process function works for all the SDI input signal  
images.  
2-1-8. Setting the analog input gain  
(option)  
When the analog input board (option) has been connected,  
the gain of the input signals can be set.  
The color tones can be changed for each input.  
Alternatively, when the analog composite input board (option)  
has been connected, the gain of the Y signals can be set.  
The setting range is 30 steps, and the gain changes by  
approximately 2 dB. The amount of change in the gain when  
it is changed by one step is not fixed.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Process1 sub menu.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F2] to select enable (On) or disable (Off) for the  
Use [F1] to display the Video Process sub menu.  
video process function using the Video Process item.  
Use [F3] to set the Y signal gain using the Y-Gain item.  
Use [F4] to set the pedestal level using the Pedestal  
Use [F2] to set the gain of the input signal (Y signal  
item.  
gain) using the Gain item.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Process2 sub menu.  
Use [F3] to set the saturation gain using the C-Gain  
item.  
Use [F4] to set the change in the hue using the Hue  
item.  
Copying the settings  
The video process settings already selected can be set for  
other input signals as well.  
On the Video Process2 sub menu, use [F5] to select the input  
signals of the copy destination, and press [F5].  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-9. Setting the analog composite input  
signals (option)  
When the analog composite input board (option) has been  
connected, the analog composite input signals can be set.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the Video Process sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the gain of the input signal (Y signal  
gain) using the Gain item.  
Use [F3] to adjust the chroma level using the Chroma  
item.  
(Maximum amount of variation: approx. 3 dB)  
The auto color control function is activated, and the  
chroma level is kept at the value that has been set.  
Use [F4] to adjust the pedestal level using the Ped item.  
(Maximum amount of variation: approx. 100 mV)  
Use [F5] to adjust the hue using the Hue item.  
(Maximum amount of variation: approx. 20°)  
Adjustment of Hue is possible when the system format  
is 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94p and 480/59.94i.  
For details on the other settings, refer to the operating  
instructions of the option board.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-10. Setting the DVI input signals  
Set the DVI input signals when the DVI input board (option) or full-HD DVI input board (option) has been connected.  
Signals with the following resolutions can be input.  
Standard  
(Digital)  
DVI Input Board  
(Digital/Analog)  
Full-HD DVI Input Board  
(Digital)  
DVI input signals  
XGA  
(1024 768)/60 Hz  
WXGA  
(1280 768)/60 Hz  
SXGA  
(1280 1024)/60 Hz  
WSXGA+  
(1680 1050)/60 Hz  
UXGA  
(1600 1200)/60 Hz  
WUXGA  
(1920 1200)/60 Hz  
1080/59.94p  
(1920 1080)/59.94 Hz  
1080/50p  
(1920 1080)/50 Hz  
1080/59.94i  
(1920 1080)/59.94 Hz  
1080/50i  
(1920 1080)/50 Hz  
720/59.94p  
(1280 720)/59.94 Hz  
720/50p  
(1280 720)/50 Hz  
: Can be set.  
—: Cannot be set.  
 If signals with any other resolutions or frequencies are input, the signals cannot be imported correctly.  
The images which are output at a time like this may be black or disturbed.  
 These boards are incompatible with the HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection).  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Use [F3] to select the scaling method.  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
The aspect ratio of the input images is  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
maintained, and the size of the images is  
increased or reduced in accordance with the  
vertical resolution.  
Use [F1] to display the DVI Input sub menu.  
The aspect ratio of the input images is  
maintained, and the size of the images is  
increased or reduced in accordance with the  
horizontal resolution.  
Use [F2] to select the signal system using the Mode  
The size of the input images is increased  
or reduced in accordance with the system  
resolution.  
item.  
Set this when the DVI input board (AV-HS04M3) has  
been connected.  
(The aspect ratio of the input images is not  
kept the same. The rate at which the image  
size is increased or reduced in the vertical  
direction and in the horizontal direction  
differs.)  
Digital  
Digital input signals of the DVI connector are  
effective.  
Analog  
Analog input signals of the DVI connector are  
effective.  
For details on the sizes that correspond to the formats,  
refer to “DVI input scaling size table” (on page 83).  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
DVI input scaling size table  
HD/1080i  
1920 1080  
HD/720P  
1280 720  
SD/NTSC  
720 487  
SD/PAL  
720 576  
DVI format  
Mode  
720  
720  
ꢀꢁꢁꢂ  
ꢆꢇꢂ  
XGA  
Fit-V  
1024 768  
576  
487  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
720  
487  
720  
576  
Fit-H  
Full  
720  
487  
720  
576  
ꢀꢆꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢅꢃꢂ  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
675  
487  
675  
576  
ꢀꢈꢉꢂ  
ꢆꢂꢂ  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
SXGA  
1280 1024  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
720  
487  
720  
576  
ꢀꢆꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢅꢃꢂ  
ꢄꢅꢂ  
ꢀꢂꢃꢂ  
WXGA  
1280 768  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
: Black images are inserted here.  
: The parts of the images protruding in these areas are cropped.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
HD/1080i  
1920 1080  
1728  
HD/720P  
1280 720  
SD/NTSC  
720 487  
SD/PAL  
720 576  
DVI format  
WSXGA+  
Mode  
1152  
Fit-V  
1680 1050  
720  
1080  
Fit-H  
Full  
720  
720  
576  
1920  
1280  
720  
487  
1080  
720  
720  
720  
720  
576  
1440  
960  
UXGA  
1600 1200  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
487  
487  
487  
720  
1080  
720  
576  
720  
576  
1920  
1280  
720  
1080  
1728  
1152  
720  
WUXGA  
1920 1200  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
1080  
720  
720  
576  
1920  
1280  
720  
487  
1080  
: Black images are inserted here.  
: The parts of the images protruding in these areas are cropped.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
HD/1080i  
1920 1080  
1920  
HD/720P  
1280 720  
SD/NTSC  
720 487  
SD/PAL  
720 576  
DVI format  
1080/59.94p  
Mode  
1280  
Fit-V  
1080/50p  
1080/59.94i  
1080/50i  
720  
1080  
1920 1080  
1920  
1920  
1920  
1920  
1920  
1280  
720  
Fit-H  
Full  
1080  
1080  
1080  
1080  
1080  
1280  
720  
1280  
720  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
Fit-V  
Fit-H  
Full  
1280 720  
1280  
720  
1280  
720  
: Black images are inserted here.  
: The parts of the images protruding in these areas are cropped.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-11. Displaying the DVI input signal information  
These are used to display the information concerning the DVI-D input signal images.  
The information cannot be changed.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the DVI Status sub menu.  
Size  
This indicates the pixel count of the images.  
Dot Clock  
This indicates the dot clock frequency of the  
images.  
H-Frequency This indicates the horizontal frequency of the  
images.  
V-Frequency This indicates the vertical frequency of the  
images.  
The formats supported are listed below.  
<DVI-D formats supported>  
Frequency  
Horizontal  
Dot clock frequency  
(MHz)  
Input video signal  
Vertical  
(Hz)  
(kHz)  
XGA  
WXGA  
1024 768  
1280 768  
1280 1024  
1680 1050  
1600 1200  
1920 1200  
1920 1080  
1920 1080  
1920 1080  
1920 1080  
1280 720  
1280 720  
Digital  
Digital  
65.0  
79.5  
48.36  
60.00  
47.78  
59.87  
SXGA  
Digital  
108.0  
146.2  
162.0  
154.0  
148.5  
63.98  
60.02  
WSXGA+  
UXGA  
Digital  
65.29  
59.95  
Digital  
75.00  
60.00  
WUXGA  
1080/50p  
1080/59.94p  
1080/50i  
1080/59.94i  
720/50p  
Digital  
74.04  
59.95  
Digital (RGB)  
Digital (RGB)  
Digital (RGB)  
Digital (RGB)  
Digital (RGB)  
Digital (RGB)  
56.25  
50.00  
148.5/1.001  
74.25  
67.50/1.001  
28.13  
60.00/1.001  
50.00  
74.25/1.001  
74.25  
33.72  
60.00/1.001  
50.00  
37.50  
720/59.94p  
74.25/1.001  
44.96  
60.00/1.001  
 If the format of the input signals is not supported, it may not be possible to import the signals properly, and a black image or  
disturbed image may appear.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-1-12. Adjusting the DVI input signals  
These are used to adjust the clock/phase and position of the  
DVI-D input signal.  
Select the clock/phase and position of the signals when the  
DVI input board (AV-HS04M3) has been connected.  
2-1-13. Automatic adjustment of the black  
level and white level (analog input  
signals)  
The black level (offset) and white level (gain) of the analog  
input signals are adjusted automatically.  
 Set this when the DVI input board (AV-HS04M3) has been  
connected.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Depending on the computer used, there may be some  
deviation from the correct levels of the black level or white  
level.  
Use [F1] to display the DVI Phase sub menu.  
To proceed with automatic adjustment to correct this  
deviation, display the black-and-white signals (BW.bmp) on  
the supplied CD-ROM or the full-screen black signals and  
full-screen white signals on the computer connected to the  
DVI input connector, and input these signals as the DVI input  
signals.  
When using the black-and-white signals, position them so that  
the boundary between black and white comes to the center of  
the monitor screen.  
Use [F2] to adjust the clock phase of the analog input  
signals using the Clk Phs item.  
While viewing the image quality, set the value at which  
the noise level is minimized.  
Use [F3] to adjust the horizontal position using the  
When using the full-screen black signals or full-screen white  
signals, display the black or white in an area that covers at  
least 80 % of the screen from the screen center.  
Before making any adjustments, follow the instructions given  
in the “Automatic adjustment of the black level” section.  
H-Pos item.  
Use [F4] to adjust the vertical position using the V-Pos  
item.  
Automatic adjustment of the black level  
Input the black-and-white signals (BW.bmp) or full-screen  
black signals.  
Use [F5] to select “Black” in the Auto item, and press [F5]  
to adjust the black level automatically.  
“Auto Setting” is displayed on the built-in display while  
adjustments are being made.  
Automatic adjustment of the white level  
Input the black-and-white signals (BW.bmp) or full-screen  
white signals.  
Use [F5] to select “White” in the Auto item, and press [F5]  
to adjust the white level automatically.  
“Auto Setting” is displayed on the built-in display while  
adjustments are being made.  
Initializing the adjusted values  
Use [F5] to select “Init” in the Auto item, and press [F5] to  
return the adjusted values to their factory settings.  
“Auto Setting” is displayed on the built-in display while  
adjustments are being made.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-2. Output signal settings  
SDI OUT1 to SDI OUT5 are SDI signal outputs.  
DVI OUT is DVI-D signal output.  
OUT A1, OUT A2, OUT B1 and OUT B2 can be set only when one of the following option boards has been connected.  
AV-HS04M4 (Analog Output Board)  
AV-HS04M5 (DVI/Analog Output Board)  
AV-HS04M7 (SDI Output Board)  
Before proceeding to set the output signals, first select the output signals to be set using the Output sub menu.  
Press the i button to light its indicator, and display the Output menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Output sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the output signals using the Select item.  
The menu display is switched depending on the selected output signals.  
The menu title is set to “MENU: Output (signal type)/output connector”.  
Signal type  
SDI, Analog, DVI-D, DVI-I  
<Example of menu (SDI)>  
<List of settings by output signal>  
Output connector  
Setting menu and numbers of sections in this manual  
DVI Output  
(Digital)  
DVI Output  
(Analog)  
Down  
Assign  
2-2-1  
SDI Output  
2-2-2  
Converter  
2-2-3  
2-2-3  
2-2-4  
SDI OUT1 to  
SDI OUT5  
Standard  
SDI output 5 lines  
Standard  
DVI-D output 1 line  
DVI OUT  
AV-HS04M4  
Analog component output 2 lines  
Option slot  
OUT A1,  
OUT A2,  
AV-HS04M5  
DVI-I output 1 line  
Analog component output 1 line  
AV-HS04M7  
SDI output 2 lines  
AV-HS04M4  
Analog component output 2 lines  
Option slot  
OUT B1,  
OUT B2  
AV-HS04M5  
DVI-I output 1 line  
Analog component output 1 line  
AV-HS04M7  
SDI output 2 lines  
: Can be set.  
—: Cannot be set.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-2-1. Assigning the output signals  
Assigning the CLN signal  
The output signals can be assigned to the SDI OUT1 to SDI  
OUT5 connectors and DVI OUT connector.  
Set KEYCLN or DSKCLN as the CLN output.  
On the Output sub menu, use [F2] to select the output  
to be set using the Select item.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Refer to “2-2. Output signal settings”.  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the type of output signal using the  
Use [F3] to select the type of output signal using the  
Source item.  
CLN item.  
PGM  
An image provided with the wipe, mix, key,  
downstream key or other effect is output at  
the switcher’s main line output.  
Key  
The PGM signals minus the key effects are  
output.  
The Key, PinP1, PinP2 and DSK effects are  
not added.  
PVW  
This is the preview output that enables the  
next operation to be checked before it is  
executed.  
DSK  
The PGM signal minus the downstream key  
effects are output.  
AUX1 to 4  
CLN  
The signals selected by the 4 lines of AUX  
buses (AUX1 to AUX4) are output.  
The clean signal (the image resulting when  
the key, downstream key or other effect  
has been removed from the PGM signal) is  
output.  
2-2-2. Setting the SDI output color range  
The color range can be set for the SDI output signal images.  
Refer to “Assigning the CLN signal”.  
 The same setting applies to all the SDI output signals.  
MV  
The multi view display signals are output.  
Multiple input signals and output signals are  
reduced in size and output to one screen.  
On the Output sub menu, use [F5] to set the color range  
using the SDI Limit item.  
KeyOut  
The key signal is output.  
Refer to “2-2. Output signal settings”.  
MEM-PVW  
In the memory preview mode, the shot  
memory and event memory effects are output  
to preview.  
Off  
The color range is not restricted.  
Use [F3] to set the output mode using the Mode item.  
108  
The amplitude level of the colors (R, G and  
B) is restricted to 0 % - 108 %.  
Normal  
The same signals as the system format  
signals are output.  
104  
100  
The amplitude level of the colors (R, G and  
B) is restricted to 0 % - 104 %.  
Down  
Convert  
(down-  
This can be selected when the SDI output  
board (option: AV-HS04M7) has been  
connected.  
The amplitude level of the colors (R, G and  
B) is restricted to 0 % - 100 %.  
converter)  
When the system format is 1080/59.94i or  
720/59.94p, the signals are output in the  
480/59.94i format.  
When the system format is 1080/50i or  
720/50p, the signals are output in the 576/50i  
format.  
When the system format is SD (480/59.94i or  
576/50i), this setting cannot be selected.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-2-3. Setting the DVI output signals  
Set the DVI output signals of the standard output (DVI OUT) and the DVI output signals if the DVI/analog output board (option)  
has been connected.  
On the Output sub menu, use [F2] to select the output to be set using the Select item.  
Refer to “2-2. Output signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the DVI Output sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the signal system using the Mode item.  
Set this when the DVI/analog output board (AV-HS04M5) has been connected.  
Digital  
DVI digital signals are output from the DVI connector.  
Analog  
DVI analog signals (RGB) are output from the DVI connector.  
When “Analog” has been selected, the display position of the image may be off depending on the monitor  
which is connected. If it is off, adjust the position at the monitor.  
For details on the adjustment method, refer to the operating instructions of the monitor.  
Use [F3] to select the resolution of the images to be output using the Size item.  
Auto  
The equipment information of the output destination is captured by the DVI signals, and the images are  
output at the optimum resolution.  
The vertical frequency is 60 Hz, and the maximum resolution is SXGA for analog output signals and  
WUXGA for digital output signals.  
If the equipment information cannot be captured or if the resolution and frequency which can be output by  
the unit are not contained in the equipment information, the images will be output at the XGA setting.  
Other signals are listed in the table below.  
<Table of DVI output signal settings>  
DVI output signal  
Standard output (DVI OUT)  
DVI/Analog Output Board  
Size  
Output  
(1024 768)/60 Hz  
(1280 768)/60 Hz  
(1280 1024)/60 Hz  
(1680 1050)/60 Hz  
(1600 1200)/60 Hz  
(1920 1200)/60 Hz  
(1920 1080)/59.94 Hz  
(1920 1080)/50 Hz  
(1920 1080)/59.94 Hz  
(1920 1080)/50 Hz  
(1280 720)/59.94 Hz  
(1280 720)/50 Hz  
(Digital)  
(Digital)  
(Analog)  
XGA  
WXGA  
SXGA  
WSXGA+  
UXGA  
WUXGA  
1080/59.94p  
1080/50p  
1080/59.94i  
1080/50i  
720/59.94p  
720/50p  
: Can be set.  
—: Cannot be set.  
The DVI signals cannot be output if the system format is 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/24PsF.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
Use [F4] to select the scaling method using the Scale  
item.  
Fit-V  
The aspect ratio of the output images is  
maintained, and the size of the images is  
increased or reduced in accordance with the  
vertical resolution.  
(Black bands are inserted into the areas  
where there are no images. The protruding  
parts of the images are cropped.)  
Fit-H  
The aspect ratio of the output images is  
maintained, and the size of the images is  
increased or reduced in accordance with the  
horizontal resolution.  
(Black bands are inserted into the areas  
where there are no images. The protruding  
parts of the images are cropped.)  
Full  
The size of the output images is increased  
or reduced in accordance with the system  
resolution.  
Fullx80%  
Fullx90%  
The size of the output image is increased or  
reduced in accordance with the 80 % size of  
the system resolution.  
The size of the output image is increased or  
reduced in accordance with the 90 % size of  
the system resolution.  
The aspect ratio is not maintained at the Full,  
Fullx80% or Fullx90% setting.  
The rate at which the image size is increased or  
reduced in the vertical direction and in the horizontal  
direction differs.  
Setting the video movement detection sensitivity  
Use [F1] to display the Assign sub menu.  
Use [F3] to set the image movement detection  
sensitivity using the Move Detect item.  
1
Toward still images  
3
Standard  
5
Toward moving images  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
Use [F3] to set the delay time of the output using the  
2-2-4. Setting the down-converter (option)  
Select the settings for the down-converter that is built into the  
SDI output board (option: AV-HS04M7).  
Delay item.  
90H(75H)  
When the system format is 1080/59.94i, the  
image is delayed from the system image  
(HD) by 90H, and output.  
On the Output sub menu, use [F2] to select the output  
to be set using the Select item.  
When the system format is 720/59.94p, the  
image is delayed from the system image  
(HD) by 90H+1F (frame), and output.  
When the system format is 1080/50i, the  
image is delayed from the system image  
(HD) by 75H, and output.  
Refer to “2-2. Output signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the Down Converter sub menu.  
When the system format is 720/50p, the  
image is delayed from the system image  
(HD) by 75H+1F (frame), and output.  
When the system format is 1080/50i or  
720/50p, “75H” is displayed on the menu.  
Use [F2] to select the scaling system using the Scale  
item.  
1F  
The image is output in-phase with a delay of  
1 frame from the system image (HD).  
Squeeze  
The top, bottom, left and right are reduced so  
that the aspect ratio is set to 4:3.  
Edge Crop  
The aspect ratio is maintained, the image  
is reduced in size in line with the vertical  
resolution, and it is cropped at the left and  
right.  
For details on the phase and delay amounts, refer to  
“2-4. Adjusting the output signal phase”.  
Use [F4] to set the extent of the edge sharpness for the  
images using the Sharp item.  
Letter Box  
The aspect ratio is maintained, the image  
is reduced in size in line with the horizontal  
resolution, and a black image is added at the  
top and bottom.  
1
Standard  
5
Very sharp edges  
System image (HD)  
For details on the other settings, refer to the operating  
instructions of the option board.  
Output image (SD)  
Squeeze  
Edge Crop  
Letter Box  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-3. Setting the sync signals  
The sync signals to be used by the system can be selected.  
External sync:  
2-4. Adjusting the output signal  
phase  
The phase of the output video signals can be adjusted.  
For synchronization with an external sync signal  
(gen-lock).  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
The reference input signal is looped through and output.  
System menu.  
BB  
Black burst signal (vertical phase of 0H)  
Use [F1] to display the Output Phase sub menu.  
BB  
Black burst signal  
Advanced  
Vertical phase of 90H when the 59.94i or  
59.94p format is selected;  
vertical phase of 75H when the 50i or 50p  
format is selected  
Use [F2], and select “0H” or “1H” using the System item.  
Tri-level sync Tri-level sync signal (vertical phase of 0H)  
This can be selected when the system  
format is 1080/24PsF.  
0H  
The output video signals are output to the  
system Reference signal with using in-phase.  
The frame synchronizer function is ON for all  
input signals.  
Internal  
For synchronization with an internal reference  
signal (INT).  
The REFOUT signal (black burst signal) is  
output from the two reference connectors.  
This cannot be selected when the system  
format is 1080/24PsF.  
1H  
The output video signals are output to the  
system Reference signal with 1H delay.  
When the frame synchronizer function is ON,  
the output video signals are output with  
1 frame + 1H delay.  
When 1080/23.98PsF or 1080/24PsF is selected as  
the format, INT (internal synchronization) cannot be  
selected in the Sync item of the Reference sub menu.  
This unit supports synchronization signals for field  
frequencies that are same as those of the system  
format.  
Use [F3] to adjust H phase using the H-Phase item.  
H-Phase can be adjusted within a range of –0.5H to  
+0.5H.  
The setting displayed on the menu differs depending  
When the unit is set to the 1080/23.98PsF format,  
however, the unit also supports black burst signals  
with 10F-1D (compliant with the SMPTE318M  
standard).  
on the system format.  
Use [F4] to adjust V phase using the V-Phase item.  
V-Phase can be adjusted within a range of –100H to  
+100H.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Reference sub menu.  
Use [F2], select the sync signal using the Sync item,  
and press the [F2] to enter the selection.  
Use [F3] to select the setup level of the black burst  
signal in the internal synchronization mode using the BB  
Setup item.  
This setting takes effect when the video system is 59.94i  
or 59.94p.  
The setup level is fixed at 0 IRE when the system is 50i  
or 50p.  
The genlock status is displayed in the Gen Lock item.  
Locked  
Synchronized with the external sync signal or  
internal reference signal.  
UnLock  
Not synchronized with the external sync  
signal or internal reference signal.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
<Phase adjustment setup>  
Reference  
(System standard)  
Approx. 0.2H  
!6$, 2ANGE  
Approx. –0.2H to +0.8H  
Internal  
Fixed DL  
Approx.  
0.2H  
s ꢂ( /UTPUT  
ꢁꢄꢂ(  
/UTPUT 0HASE 6ARIABLE 2ANGE  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
!6$, 2ANGE  
Internal  
Fixed DL  
Approx. –0.7H to +0.3H  
Shortest  
/UTPUT ꢁꢄꢀꢅꢆ(  
Approx.  
0.3H  
/UTPUT 0HASE 6ARIABLE 2ANGE  
+0.5H  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
!6$, 2ANGE  
Internal  
Fixed DL  
Approx. +0.3H to +1.3H  
,ONGEST /UTPUT  
ꢁꢄꢂꢅꢆ(  
Approx.  
0.3H  
/UTPUT 0HASE 6ARIABLE 2ANGE  
+0.5H  
s ꢀ( /UTPUT  
ꢁꢂ& DELAY FOR 2EFERENCE AND INꢃPHASE OUTPUT  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
Approx.  
0.2H  
FS Range  
Internal  
MAX less than approximately 1 frame  
Fixed DL  
/UTPUT 0HASE 6ARIABLE 2ANGE  
H Phase (–0.5H to +0.5H) +  
V Phase ( 100 lines)  
Reference (Phase Reference)  
AVDL Range: Range for automatic phase adjustment.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
<Phases and delay amounts of input/output signals during HD format use>  
Frame synchronizer  
FS:  
On, Off  
Mode:  
Normal, Up Convert or  
Dot by Dot (cannot be  
selected when the system  
format is 720p)  
Output signals  
Input signals  
Video effects  
Down-converter  
Delay:  
90H (75H) or 1F  
See “2-1-1. Setting the frame synchronizer”.  
See “2-2-4. Setting the down-converter  
(option)”.  
Output  
Phase  
Output signal  
Normal  
Output signal   
Down Converter (90H)  
Output signal   
Down Converter (1F)  
Input  
Mode  
Non-  
synchronized  
input  
Delay  
Delay  
Phase  
Delay  
Phase  
System  
FS  
Phase  
amount  
amount  
amount  
Sync signal (Reference): Black burst signal (BB), tri-level sync signal (Tri-level sync), internal reference signal (Internal)  
1H  
Normal  
Off  
Not possible  
Reference+1H 1H  
1H+90H  
In-phase  
1H+1F  
+90H  
with   
Normal  
On  
Possible  
Possible  
Reference+1H Max.  
Max.  
1F+1H  
+90H  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F+1H  
+90H  
1F+1H  
with   
Up Convert/ On  
Dot by Dot  
(Forced)  
0H  
Normal/  
On  
Possible  
In-phase with  
Reference  
Max.  
Max.  
1F+90H  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F  
+90H  
(Example 1) Up Convert/ (Forced)  
1F  
1H  
with   
Dot by Dot  
Sync signal (Reference): Black burst signal (BB Advanced)  
1H  
Normal  
Off  
Not possible  
Reference  
–90H+1H  
1H+90H  
In-phase  
1F+1H  
+90H  
with   
Normal  
On  
Possible  
Possible  
Reference  
–90H+1H  
Max.  
1F–90H  
+1H  
Max.  
1F+1H  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F–90H  
+1H  
+90H  
with   
Up Convert/ On  
Dot by Dot  
(Forced)  
0H  
Normal/  
On  
Possible  
Reference  
–90H  
Max.  
1F–90H  
Max.  
1F  
In-phase  
Max.  
2F–90H  
+90H  
(In-phase with  
Reference)  
(Example 2) Up Convert/ (Forced)  
with   
Dot by Dot  
For 1080/50i and 720/50p, the 90H indicated above becomes 75H.  
Conversion based on the HD format applies for 1H.  
When DVE effect and PinP effect have been used as the video effects, the output signal is delayed by +1F.  
The phase and delay amount for the DVI input signals are the same as when Up Convert/Dot by Dot is selected since the  
frame synchronizer is set to the On mode.  
The DVI output signals are delayed by +1F.  
When images are output to a multi view display, they are delayed by +1F.  
When DVI output signals are output images for a multi view display, the output images are delayed by +2F.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
<Phase relationship between input signals and output signals>  
(for 1080/59.94i format)  
(Example 1)  
Input signals  
F1  
F2  
(non-synchronized)  
Sync signal  
(Reference)  
1F (frame)  
F1  
F2  
Output signal   
Max. 1F  
F1  
F2  
Output signal (90H)  
Max. 1F+90H  
F1  
F2  
Output signal (1F)  
Max. 2F  
(Example 2)  
Input signals  
(non-synchronized)  
F1  
F2  
Sync signal  
(Reference)  
1F (frame)  
F1  
F2  
Output signal   
Max.  
1F–90H  
F1  
F2  
Output signal (90H)  
Max. 1F  
F1  
F2  
Output signal (1F)  
Max. 2F–90H  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-5. Setting the multi view display  
1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8
2-5-1. Setting the screen layout  
The following nine options are available as split screen  
layouts.  
9
10  
14  
11  
15  
12  
16  
4Split  
6-aSplit  
10-aSplit  
5-aSplit  
6-bSplit  
10-bSplit  
5-bSplit  
9Split  
13  
16Split  
16Split  
Press the x button to light its indicator, and display the  
Multi View Display menu.  
Display of the following signals can be assigned to sub  
screens 1 to 16.  
Use [F1] to display the MV Split sub menu.  
Signals that can be assigned  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8, DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-B1, IN-B2, CBGD1,  
CBGD2, Still1V, Still1K, Still2V, Still2K, Clip1V, Clip1K, Clip2V,  
Clip2K, PGM, PVW, MEM-PVW, Key Out, AUX1 to AUX4, Clock  
Use [F2] to set the split-screen display mode using the  
Split item.  
<Display modes>  
Use [F1] to display the MV Pattern 1/4 to MV Pattern  
4/4 sub menus.  
1
3
2
4
Use [F2] to [F5] to set the names of the signals to be  
4Split  
displayed on the sub screens (1 to 16).  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8, DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-B1, IN-B2,  
CBGD1, CBGD2, Still1V, Still1K, Still2V, Still2K, Clip1V,  
Clip1K, Clip2V, Clip2K, PGM, PVW, MEM-PVW, Key Out,  
AUX1 to AUX4, Clock  
3
4
5
1
2
When the input signals (SDI IN1 to SDI IN8, DVI IN,  
IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-B1 or IN-B2) have been selected, the  
material name set using the Input menu Name sub  
menu is displayed (with up to 10 characters).  
3
4
5
1
2
5-aSplit  
5-bSplit  
When the input signals have been selected by the AUX  
buses (AUX1 to AUX4), the first four characters of the  
material name is displayed inside [ ].  
3
4
5
6
1
2
Display that appears when IN1 (CAM1) has been selected  
by the AUX1:  
AUX1[CAM1]  
3
4
5
6
1
2
Display that appears when IN2 (CAMERA2) has been  
selected by the AUX2:  
6-aSplit  
6-bSplit  
AUX2[CAME]  
1
4
7
2
5
3
6
9
When the AUX bus for which “MV” has been selected  
is displayed on the sub screen of the multi view display,  
the images are looped as if two mirrors were facing each  
other.  
8
9Split  
7
3
8
4
9
10  
6
1
2
5
3
7
4
8
5
6
9
10  
1
2
10-aSplit  
10-bSplit  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-5-2. Setting the split frame and  
characters  
Set the frame, character brightness and background of the  
split screens to be displayed on the multi view display.  
2-5-3. Setting the tally displays  
Set the tally displays to be superimposed onto the split frame  
of the multi view display.  
The red tally indicates material consisting of program outputs.  
The green tally indicates material selected by the preset bus.  
Press the x button to light its indicator, and display the  
On the MV Frame sub menu, use [F5] to set the tally  
displays using the Tally item.  
Multi View Display menu.  
Use [F1] to display the MV Frame sub menu.  
Red+Green  
Both the red tally and green tally are  
displayed.  
Use [F2] to set the split frame brightness and split frame  
display using the Frame item.  
Red  
Off  
Only the red tally is displayed.  
No tally displays are shown.  
LUM0%,  
Select one of these settings for the  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%  
brightness of the split frame (gray scale).  
The red tally is not displayed during FTB operation while  
the program images have been completely faded out to a  
black screen. At this time, the green tally is displayed for  
images consisting of program images.  
Off  
The split frame is not displayed.  
However, the red tally is displayed when a setting other  
than “White” or “Black” has been selected for the image  
used for fading out.  
Refer to “1-7. FTB (Fade to Black)”.  
The red tally and green tally signals are output from the  
tally output connector on the rear panel.  
Use [F3] to set the character brightness and character  
display using the Character item.  
LUM0%,  
Select one of these character (gray scale)  
brightness settings.  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%  
Refer to “4-1. Setting the GPI I/O”.  
Off  
The characters are not displayed.  
Neither is the character background shown.  
Use [F4] to set whether the character background  
(half-tone) is to be displayed using the Label item.  
On  
Off  
The character background is displayed.  
The character background is not displayed.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-5-4. Changing the material names  
User type setting procedure  
The material names of the input signals (SDI IN1 to SDI IN8,  
DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-B1 or IN-B2) to be set on the multi  
view display can be changed.  
These names can be selected from the default settings or  
user settings.  
When the preset settings and user settings are established,  
the material name (CAM1, etc.) is displayed.  
On the Name sub menu, use [F2] to select “User” using  
the Type item.  
Press [F3] to display the keyboard screen.  
On the Input sub menu, use [F2] to select the input to  
be set using the Select item.  
Using [F1] to [F3], input the name, and press [F4].  
To clear the name which has been input and close the  
keyboard screen, press [F5].  
Refer to “2-1. Input signal settings”.  
Use [F1] to display the Name sub menu.  
Refer to “2-2-2. Keyboard screen operations”  
(<Basics> Operating Instructions).  
Use [F2] to select the type of material names using the  
Type item.  
Default  
(default  
settings)  
Select the material names from the following:  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8, DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2,  
IN-B1 and IN-B2.  
User  
(user  
The material names are set using up to 7  
characters.  
settings)  
Preset type setting procedure  
On the Name sub menu, use [F2] to select “Preset”  
using the Type item.  
Use [F3] to select the material name using the Name  
item.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-5-5. Setting the level meters  
2-5-7. Setting the markers  
Level meters for the embedded audio signals transferred by  
the SDI input can be displayed on the split screens.  
Left display:  
Safety markers can be displayed for the multi view materials.  
The markers can be displayed when PGM or PVW materials  
are to be displayed in half their original size.  
Channel 1 of group 1  
Right display:  
4Split  
Sub screens 1 to 4  
1 or 2 sub screens  
5/6/10Split  
Channel 2 of group 1  
Press the x button to light its indicator, and display the  
On the Display sub menu, use [F4] to set the marker  
Multi View Display menu.  
display using the Marker item.  
Use [F1] to display the Display sub menu.  
4:3  
The markers are displayed using the 4:3  
aspect ratio.  
Use [F2] to set the level meter display using the Level  
Meter item.  
16:9  
Off  
The markers are displayed using the 16:9  
aspect ratio.  
On  
Off  
The level meters are displayed.  
The markers are not displayed.  
The level meters are not displayed.  
Use [F5] to set the size of the markers using the Marker  
Size item.  
2-5-6. Setting the input signal marks  
The status of the input signals can be displayed in front of the  
material names displayed on the split screens.  
2-5-8. High-resolution multi view mode  
The image output on a multi view display can be output in  
high resolution to DVI-D output.  
 These settings can be established when the system mode  
is set to SD.  
“F” mark:  
This appears when the input signals are frozen.  
“ ! ” mark:  
This appears when no signals are input or when signals  
with different formats are input.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
System menu.  
When the “F” mark is displayed, the “!” mark is not  
displayed.  
Use [F1] to display the Format sub menu.  
On the Display sub menu, use [F3] to set the input  
signal status display using the Input Status item.  
Use [F3] to set “On” or “Off” using the Hi Resolution  
item, and press the [F3].  
Turning this setting “On” switches the Source item to  
the default value if the following output signals in the  
Source item of the Assign submenu under the Output  
menu are set to “MV”.  
On  
Off  
The input signal status is displayed.  
The input signal status is not displayed.  
SDI OUT1 to SDI OUT5, OUT-A1, OUT-A2,  
OUT-B1, OUT-B2  
Turning this setting “On”, while the multi view display  
signal is output to the AUX bus or DISP bus, switches  
the output signal to the black signal (internally  
generated signal).  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Input/output signal settings  
2-6. Setting the ancillary data and  
embedded audio data  
Setting for the output signals of the multi view display  
A function for allowing the V ancillary data and embedded  
audio data of the SDI input signals to pass through can be  
set.  
Use [F5] to select “PGM”, “PVW” or “Off” using the MV  
item.  
When an HD format is used:  
PGM  
PVW  
Off  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
of the SDI input materials selected by the  
PGM bus are allowed to pass through.  
The ancillary data starting with line 9 is allowed to pass  
through.  
When an SD format is used:  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
of the SDI input materials selected by the  
PST bus are allowed to pass through.  
The ancillary data starting with line 12 is allowed to  
pass through.  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
are not allowed to pass through.  
 When 1080/59.94i, 720/59.94p, 1080/50i or 720/50p has  
been selected as the unit’s system format setting, it is not  
possible to allow the ancillary data and embedded audio  
data to pass through even if SD format signals (480/59.94i  
or 576/50i) have been input in the Dot by Dot mode or Up  
Convert mode.  
Setting for the output signals of the AUX buses (AUX1  
to AUX4)  
Refer to “2-1-2. Setting the input mode”.  
Use [F2] to select “On” or “Off” using the AUX item.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
On  
Off  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
of the SDI input materials selected by the  
AUX bus (AUX1 to AUX4) are allowed to pass  
through.  
System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Ancillary sub menu.  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
are not allowed to pass through.  
Setting for the program output signals  
Use [F3] to select “On” or “Off” using the PGM item.  
On  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
of the SDI input materials selected by the  
PGM bus are allowed to pass through.  
Off  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
are not allowed to pass through.  
Setting for the preview output signals  
Use [F4] to select “On” or “Off” using the PVW item.  
On  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
of the SDI input materials selected by the  
PST bus are allowed to pass through.  
Off  
The ancillary data and embedded audio data  
are not allowed to pass through.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-1. Setting the system format  
One system format (input/output signal) can be selected.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Format sub menu.  
Use [F2], select the format using the Format item, and  
press the [F2] to enter the selection.  
Setting the 16:9 squeeze mode  
When the 16:9 squeeze mode is selected, a border width  
(wipe or PinP) is established that considers cases where SD  
format images are to be converted into the 16:9 aspect ratio  
and used.  
This setting is possible when SD is selected as the system  
format setting.  
On the Format sub menu, use [F4] to select whether to  
support the squeeze mode using the 16:9 Squeeze item.  
On  
Off  
The squeeze mode is supported.  
The squeeze mode is not supported.  
Border width (graphical representation) when the squeeze  
mode is supported  
Squeeze (4:3)  
16:9  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-2. Setting the crosspoints  
3-2-1. Assigning signals to the crosspoints  
External video input signals and internally generated signals can be assigned to crosspoint buttons 1 to 24.  
When one of the crosspoint buttons 1 to 24 is held down, the status of the signal assigned is displayed on the built-in display  
while the button is held down.  
Changing the current assignment of the signals selected by the crosspoint buttons will cause the positions of the lit crosspoint  
buttons to change to correspond with the assignment change. The images output at this time will remain unchanged.  
The table below lists the materials which can be assigned.  
What appears on the  
Signal  
Description  
display  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8  
DVI IN  
IN1 to IN8  
DVI  
SDI input 1 to 8  
DVI-D input  
Option slot  
IN-A1, IN-A2,  
IN-B1, IN-B2  
A1, A2,  
B1, B2  
(SDI, analog component, analog composite and DVI)  
Internally generated signal (black)  
Black  
BLK  
Internally generated signal (color background)  
Internally generated signal (color bar)  
CBGD1, CBGD2  
CBAR  
CBD1, CBD2  
CBAR  
Still1V, Still1K,  
Still2V, Still2K  
ST1V, ST1K,  
ST2V, ST2K  
Still image video memory  
Clip1V, Clip1K,  
Clip2V, Clip2K  
CL1V, CL1K,  
CL2V, CL2K  
Moving image video memory  
MEM-PVW  
AUX1 to AUX4  
CLN  
MPV  
Memory preview (AUX bus and built-in display images only)  
AUX bus output (built-in display images only)  
CLN (AUX bus and built-in display images only)  
KeyOut (AUX bus and built-in display images only)  
SHIFT function  
AUX1 to AUX4  
CLN  
KeyOut  
Shift  
KOUT  
SHIFT  
None  
None  
No assignment  
The image will not be changed by pressing any button to which “None” is assigned.  
The table below lists the default settings.  
What appears on  
the display  
What appears on  
the display  
What appears on  
the display  
Button  
Button  
Button  
XPT1  
XPT2  
XPT3  
XPT4  
XPT5  
XPT6  
XPT7  
XPT8  
BLK  
IN1  
IN2  
IN3  
IN4  
IN5  
IN6  
IN7  
XPT9  
XPT10  
XPT11  
XPT12  
XPT13  
XPT14  
XPT15  
XPT16  
IN8  
DVI  
A1  
XPT17  
XPT18  
XPT19  
XPT20  
XPT21  
XPT22  
XPT23  
XPT24  
CBD1  
ST1V  
None  
None  
KOUT  
CLN  
None  
A2  
B1  
B2  
None  
None  
CBAR  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-2-2. Setting the crosspoint switching  
The timing at which the crosspoints are to be switched can be  
set.  
This switching involves the operations of the crosspoint  
buttons and [Cut] button.  
Press the x button to light its indicator, and display the  
XPT menu.  
Use [F1] to display the XPT Switch sub menu.  
Use [F2], and select the switching timing using the  
Timing item.  
Any  
The crosspoints are switched in the nearest  
field. This is suited to live applications.  
Field1  
Field2  
The crosspoints are switched in field 1.  
This is suited to editing applications.  
The crosspoints are switched in field 2.  
This is suited to editing applications.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
<Setting method>  
3-3. Button assignments  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
3-3-1. Setting the user buttons  
Config menu.  
The user can assign several functions which can be set using  
the menu items into eight user buttons (U1 to U8).  
The user buttons light in amber when the assigned function is  
ON and are off when the assigned function is OFF.  
Each time the user button is pressed, the function setting  
alternates between ON and OFF.  
Use [F1] to display the User Button1 sub menu and  
User Button2 sub menu.  
User Button1 sub menu  
The table below lists the functions which can be assigned to  
the user buttons (U1 to U8).  
Use [F2] to select the function to be assigned to the  
[U1] button using the User1 item.  
Function name  
Key PVW  
Description of function  
Output the key image to the preview output.  
Use [F3] to select the function to be assigned to the  
PinP PVW  
Outputs the PinP1 and PinP2 images  
simultaneously to the preview output.  
[U2] button using the User2 item.  
PinP1 PVW  
PinP2 PVW  
DSK PVW  
GPII-EN  
Output the PinP1 image to the preview output.  
Output the PinP2 image to the preview output.  
Output the DSK image to the preview output.  
Enables or disables GPI-In.  
Use [F4] to select the function to be assigned to the  
[U3] button using the User3 item.  
Use [F5] to select the function to be assigned to the  
[U4] button using the User4 item.  
GPIO-EN  
SHIFT  
Enables or disables GPI-Out.  
Switches all the A/B bus and AUX bus  
crosspoints between front and rear.  
User Button2 sub menu  
AUX Trans  
PinP Trans  
EFF DSLV  
Enables or disables the AUX bus transitions.  
Enables or disables the PinP bus transitions.  
Switches effect dissolve between ON and  
OFF.  
Use [F2] to select the function to be assigned to the  
[U5] button using the User5 item.  
Use [F3] to select the function to be assigned to the  
Default settings  
[U6] button using the User6 item.  
Button  
U1  
Function name  
Button  
U5  
Function name  
AUX Trans  
EFF DSLV  
SHIFT  
Use [F4] to select the function to be assigned to the  
KEY PVW  
PinP PVW  
DSK PVW  
PinP Trans  
[U7] button using the User7 item.  
U2  
U6  
U3  
U7  
Use [F5] to select the function to be assigned to the  
U4  
U8  
None  
[U8] button using the User8 item.  
When a plug-in software application is introduced, the  
functions inherent to that application are sometimes  
added as the functions which are assigned.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose  
system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model  
with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-5. Network settings  
3-4. Setting the date and time  
Proceed with the network settings to perform such tasks as  
updating the software version via LAN.  
The user can set the date and time to be used as the memory  
card’s time stamp.  
The network initial setup is: IP address: 192.168.0.8, subnet  
mask: 255.255.255.0.  
Be absolutely sure to set them when an memory card is to be  
used.  
When using the host computer with settings matching the  
initial setup, it is not necessary to setup via the menu.  
Setting the date  
For the setting to take effect, the system must be rebooted.  
Turn the system’s power off and then back on.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
System menu.  
Setting the IP address  
Use [F1] to display the Date sub menu.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Network1 sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the year using the Year item.  
Use [F3] to set the month using the Month item.  
Use [F4] to set the day using the Date item.  
Press the [F5] to enter the year/month/day.  
Use [F2] to [F5] to set the IP address, and press the  
[F5] (Save) to enter the address.  
Setting the time  
Setting the subnet mask  
On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Network2  
On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Time sub  
sub menu.  
menu.  
Use [F2] to [F5] to set the subnet mask, and press the  
Use [F2] to set the hour using the Hour item.  
Use [F3] to set the minutes using the Minute item.  
Use [F4] to set the seconds using the Second item.  
Press the [F5] to enter the hour/minutes/seconds.  
[F5] (Save) to enter the mask.  
Setting the gateway  
On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Network3  
sub menu.  
Use [F2] to [F5] to set the gateway, and then press [F5]  
(Save) to enter the setting.  
Display the MAC address  
On the System menu, use [F1] to display the Network4  
sub menu.  
The MAC address now appears.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-6. Setting the built-in display  
backlight and button  
illumination  
Setting the button illumination  
The button indicators in the areas listed below can be kept  
illuminated all the time.  
It is then easier to read the characters displayed on the  
buttons even when the unit is operated in dark places.  
Memory/wipe pattern/number key area  
User button area  
Setting the built-in display backlight  
The built-in display backlight can be set to ON or OFF.  
It is also possible to automatically turn off the built-in display  
backlight when no control panel operation is performed within  
a set time interval.  
Display area  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Use [F1] to display the Button Illumination sub menu.  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the LCD BL sub menu.  
Use [F2] to set the illumination of the button indicators  
using the Illumination item.  
Use [F2] to select the setting for the backlight using the  
On  
Off  
The button indicators are illuminated.  
Light item.  
The button indicators are not illuminated.  
On  
Off  
Backlight is turned on all the time.  
The backlight turns off as soon as “Off” is  
selected as the setting.  
Use [F3] to set the brightness of the illumination using  
the Adjust item.  
It lights up when the control panel is  
operated.  
(The “On” status is selected as the setting.)  
60, 120, 180  
When no control panel operation is  
performed within a set time interval  
(60 minutes, 120 minutes, 180 minutes),  
the built-in display backlight is turned off  
automatically.  
Even when the set time interval elapses  
and the display backlight is turned off, the  
backlight comes back on when a control  
panel operation is performed.  
Use [F3] to set the brightness of the backlight using the  
Adjust item.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-7. Status displays  
3-7-1. Alarm status displays  
The alert status (alarms) for this unit’s power supply and cooling fan are displayed on the built-in display.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Alarm sub menu.  
The alert status of the power supplies is displayed in the Power item.  
The alert status of the cooling fan is displayed in the Fan item.  
The alert status of the internal temperature is displayed in the Temperature item.  
No Alarm  
Alarm  
No irregularity  
Irregularity  
3-7-2. Alarm message  
A message is displayed on the built-in display when an alarm has occurred.  
Alarm message displayed  
ALARM ! Fan Stop  
Type of trouble  
Shutdown of the cooling fan  
Operation  
When OK is pressed, the alarm message  
is cleared.  
Contact your dealer immediately.  
ALARM ! Power Failure  
ALARM ! Temperature  
Drop in the supply voltage  
Rise in the temperature inside the unit  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-7-3. Displaying the version information  
and option information  
Information on the unit’s software and hardware versions and  
the versions of the options are displayed.  
Displaying the version information  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Main Version sub menu.  
The unit’s system version information is displayed in  
the System Version item.  
Use [F3] to select the type (Soft or FPGA) of the version  
to be displayed using the Module Type item.  
The item of the module that corresponds to the  
selected type can be selected as the Select item  
using [F4].  
When [F4] is used, the version of the selected item is  
displayed in the Version item of [F5].  
Displaying the option version information  
Use [F1] to display the Option Version sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the option slot using the Select item.  
SLOT A  
SLOT B  
Option slot A  
Option slot B  
The types of the option boards connected are displayed  
in the Board item.  
The option board version information is displayed in the  
Version item.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. System settings  
3-8. Initialization  
3-8-1. Initializing setting data  
3-8-2. Initializing fader  
Initialization returns the set data to the factory shipment  
status.  
The range for executing a transition can be initialized by  
operating the fader lever.  
The user can select one of two modes in which to initialize the  
data, namely, Mode A” or “Mode B”.  
Initialization should be performed when transitions are not  
completed to the end even when the fader lever has been  
moved as far as it will go.  
<Items and data which are not initialized>  
All plug-in menus  
Press [F3] in the Initial sub menu to perform  
(In “Mode B”, these menus are initialized.)  
All Shot Memory menus  
initialization.  
All Event Memory menus  
The items of the System menu listed below:  
Network1, Network2, Network3, Date, Time  
Video memory data  
When initializing, use [F3] to select “Yes” and press the  
[F3].  
Still (still images), Clip (moving images)  
When not initializing, use [F3] to select “No” and press  
the [F3].  
Press the s button to light its indicator and display the  
System menu.  
Use [F1] to display the Initial sub menu.  
Use [F2] to select the initialization mode (“Mode A” or  
“Mode B”).  
Press [F2] to proceed with the initializing.  
Once initialization has been completed the power of the  
unit shuts off and turns back on again automatically.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. External interfaces  
4-1. Setting the GPI I/O  
The user can set the functions that are to be controlled from  
the GPI ports and set whether to enable the control.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the GPI-In Setting sub menu (or  
GPI-Out Setting sub menu).  
Use [F2] to set “On” or “Off” for the control to be  
exercised from the ports using the GPI-In Enable item  
(or GPI-Out Enable item).  
Use [F3] to set the AUX bus to be used to notify the tally  
using the AUX Sel item.  
Use [F1] to display GPI-In Port 1/2 sub menu and  
GPI-In Port 2/2 sub menu (or GPI-Out Port 1/5 sub  
menu to GPI-Out Port 5/5 sub menu).  
Use [F2] to [F5] to allocate the functions to be assigned  
to the respective pin numbers.  
Refer to “Control using the GPI Input port” and  
“Output from the GPI Output port”.  
Settings for the GPI-In Enable (or GPI-Out Enable) item  
can be assigned to one of the user buttons.  
Refer to “3-3-1. Setting the user buttons”.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. External interfaces  
Control using the GPI Input port  
Assign Item  
AUTO  
Description of function assigned  
Control method  
AUTO button in transition area  
CUT button in transition area  
KEY ON button in transition area  
DSK ON button in transition area  
PinP1 ON button in transition area  
PinP2 ON button in transition area  
FTB button in transition area  
AUTO button when the background is selected  
CUT button when the background is selected  
AUTO button when the key is selected  
CUT button when the key is selected  
Still1 recording  
CUT  
KEY ON  
DSK ON  
PinP1 ON  
PinP2 ON  
FTB  
BKGD AUTO  
BKGD CUT  
KEY AUTO  
KEY CUT  
REC Still1  
REC Still2  
REC Clip1  
REC Clip2  
STOP Clip1  
STOP Clip2  
PLAY Clip1  
PLAY Clip2  
Operations are performed using  
contact inputs (30 ms or more).  
Still2 recording  
Clip1 recording start  
Clip2 recording start  
Clip1 recording stop or playback stop  
Clip2 recording stop or playback stop  
Clip1 playback start  
Clip2 playback start  
AUX XPT  
1 to 24  
Crosspoint buttons (1 to 24) used to switch the AUX buses.  
Select the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) to be controlled using the  
menu.  
REDTly DSBL  
GRNTly DSBL  
AUXTly DSBL  
No Assign  
Red tally signal is not output  
Green tally signal is not output  
AUX tally signal is not output  
No function assigned  
Functions are enabled using  
contact inputs (or disabled in open  
status).  
When a plug-in software application is introduced, the functions inherent to that application are sometimes added as the  
functions which are assigned.  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. External interfaces  
Output from the GPI Output port  
Assign Item  
CUT  
Description of function assigned  
Output  
Cut transition executed  
KEY ON  
Key transition start  
DSK ON  
DSK transition start  
PinP1 ON  
PinP2 ON  
FTB ON  
PinP1 transition start  
Low pulses are output  
(approx. 50 to 60 ms).  
PinP2 transition start  
FTB transition start  
BKGD CUT  
KEY CUT  
Cut transition for the background executed  
Cut transition for a key executed  
Event set by event memory executed  
Auto transition execution in progress  
Auto transition execution in progress for background  
Auto transition execution in progress for key  
Transition execution in progress for key  
Transition execution in progress for DSK  
Transition execution in progress for PinP1  
Transition execution in progress for PinP2  
Transition execution in progress for FTB  
Red tally for INPUT1 to INPUT131  
Green tally for INPUT1 to INPUT131  
EVENTMEM  
AUTO  
BKGD AUTO  
KEY AUTO  
KEY Trans  
DSK Trans  
PinP1 Trans  
PinP2 Trans  
FTB Trans  
REDTly1 to 13  
GRNTly1 to 13  
AUXTly1 to 13  
A low level is output.  
A low level is output during tally  
output.  
When INPUT1 to INPUT131 have been selected by the AUX bus  
Select the AUX buses (AUX1 to AUX4) whose signals are to be  
output using the menu.  
A low level is output while the inputs  
are selected.  
No Assign  
No function assigned  
1: The following inputs are used for INPUT1 to INPUT13.  
 INPUT1 to INPUT8: SDI IN1 to SDI IN8  
 INPUT9:  
DVI IN  
 INPUT10, INPUT11: IN A1, IN A2  
 INPUT12, INPUT13: IN B1, IN B2  
When a plug-in software application is introduced, the functions inherent to that application are sometimes added as the  
2  
functions which are assigned.  
2: This function can be actuated in any model whose system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
These operations cannot be performed in a model with a system version of below V2.00.00.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. External interfaces  
Example of GPI Out and ALARM connections  
Example of GPI In connections  
Ensure that the conditions given below are satisfied.  
Provide contact inputs.  
Dielectric strength: Max. DC 24 V  
AV-HS410  
Current:  
Max. 50 mA  
+3.3 V  
(Max. voltage: 24 V)  
Tally LED  
AV-HS410  
GPI In  
Com  
GPI Out  
ALARM Out  
(Max. current: 50 mA)  
Com  
TALLY/GPI 1  
TALLY/GPI 2  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
15 14 13 12 11 10  
9
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GPI-Out1  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
GPI-Out10  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
GPI-Out9  
GPI-Out2  
ALARM Out  
GPI-Out3  
GPI-In1  
9
GPI-Out18  
GPI-Out11  
GPI-Out19  
GPI-Out12  
GPI-In5  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GPI-Out4  
GPI-In2  
GPI-Out13  
GPI-In6  
GPI-Out5  
GPI-In3  
GPI-Out14  
GPI-In7  
GPI-Out6  
GPI-In4  
GPI-Out15  
GPI-In8  
GPI-Out7  
GPI-Com  
GPI-Out8  
GPI-Out16  
GPI-Com  
GPI-Out17  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. External interfaces  
4-2. LAN  
4-4. COM  
Connect the unit and computer or the unit and an external  
device .  
An external device can be controlled from the unit.  
 It supports plug-in software.  
:An external device can be controlled from the unit.  
The communication system can be selected using the setting  
menu.  
 Use a crossover cable (category 5 or above) when  
connecting the equipment directly.  
 Use a straight cable (category 5 or above) when  
connecting the equipment through a hub (switching hub).  
 It supports plug-in software.  
Press the s button to light its indicator, and display the  
Config menu.  
Use [F1] to display the COM-Port sub menu.  
4-3. EDITOR  
Use [F2] to select the communication system using the  
The unit can be controlled by an external device by  
connecting the device to the EDITOR connector.  
 It supports plug-in software.  
Mode item.  
Mode: 1  
Mode: 2  
Mode: 3  
(default setting)  
Use it with the settings below.  
Baud rate  
9600 bps  
8 bit  
38400 bps  
8 bit  
38400 bps  
8 bit  
Baud rate:  
38400 bps  
Character  
length  
Character length: 8 bit  
Parity:  
Stop bit:  
Flow control:  
Odd  
1 bit  
None  
Parity  
None  
1 bit  
Odd  
1 bit  
None  
1 bit  
Stop bit  
Flow control  
None  
None  
None  
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
9
8
7
6
RS-422, D-sub 9-pin, female, inch screw  
Pin No.  
Signal name  
FRAME GROUND  
TXD –  
Description of signal  
Frame ground  
Send data (–)  
Receive data (+)  
Ground  
RS-422, D-sub 9-pin, female, inch screw  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Pin No.  
Signal name  
FRAME GROUND  
RXD –  
Description of signal  
Frame ground  
Receive data (–)  
Send data (+)  
Ground  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RXD +  
GROUND  
NC  
TXD +  
Not used  
GROUND  
NC  
GROUND  
TXD +  
Ground  
Not used  
Send data (+)  
Receive data (–)  
Frame ground  
GROUND  
RXD +  
Ground  
RXD –  
Receive data (+)  
Send data (–)  
Frame ground  
FRAME GROUND  
TXD –  
FRAME GROUND  
 The pin assignment is different from that of the EDITOR  
connector.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. External interfaces  
Version information  
4-5. Plug-in software  
This unit enables plug-in software to be registered and its  
functions to be added.  
The plug-in software version is displayed in the Version  
item of the “plug-in name” sub menu.  
 For detailed information regarding the plug-in software, ask  
the dealer from whom you purchased your unit.  
Deleting plug-in software  
Registering a plug-in  
The plug-in software can be loaded from an memory card,  
and registered in the unit.  
Refer to “1-12-3. Loading data from memory cards”.  
Press the l button to display the Plug-in menu.  
Use [F1] to display the “plug-in name” sub menu whose  
plug-in software is to be deleted, and press [F5].  
When the plug-in software is registered, separate menu  
operations can be performed.  
It is also possible to delete plug-in software which has been  
registered.  
The line of the selected “plug-in name” sub menu  
changes to a light gray display (it is grayed out).  
The plug-in software in question is deleted when the unit  
is next started up.  
Opening the separate menu of the plug-in  
Press the l button to light its indicator, and display the  
Plug-in menu.  
Plug-in software registration information  
Use [F1] to select the plug-in software.  
If the [MENU MODE] button of the display is pressed  
to set the display mode to “Menu display/Subscreen/  
Image display” when the Plug-in menu is displayed, the  
registration information of the plug-in software applications  
is displayed in the form of a list on the built-in display.  
The user can verify which plug-in software has been  
registered at which number on the Plug-in List.  
The plug-in name of the plug-in software registered is  
displayed on the sub menu.  
Press [F2] to open the menu of the plug-in software.  
Plug-in startup setting  
This setting determines whether the plug-in software is to  
be started up when the unit is started up.  
On the “plug-in name” sub menu, use [F3] to establish the  
setting at startup using the Enable item.  
On  
Off  
The plug-in software is started up when the  
unit is started up.  
The plug-in software is not started up when  
the unit is started up.  
The plug-in startup setting takes effect when the unit is  
next started up.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
 Settings for items indicated with () are reflected when the item is selected and [F2], [F3], [F4] or [F5] is pressed.  
Sub menu  
Use [F1] to select.  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Menu  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Background  
Border  
Parameter  
Border  
On, Off  
Off  
Width  
Soft  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.1 to 100.0  
5.0  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
Border Color  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
WIPE Position Parameter  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Copy To Key  
Execute  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
100.00  
Default value  
0.00  
0.00  
SQ Position  
Modify  
Parameter  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Copy To Key  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
Execute  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
Trim  
4:3 Auto  
Setting range  
Off, 16:9(On), On, Off  
(Selection  
4:3, 4:3Smth  
enabled when HD  
format is used)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Off  
3D Modify  
Light  
On, Off  
Off  
Size  
Radius  
Angle  
Setting range  
Default value  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
0.000 to 1.000 ꢀ45 to +45  
0.500  
0
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Color Background CBGD1 Main  
Parameter  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
120.0  
100.0  
100.0  
Blue  
CBGD1 Sub  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
CBGD1 Wash Parameter  
Setting range  
Wash  
On, Off  
Off  
Color  
R-Sat  
R-Lum  
0.0 to 108.0  
100.0  
Dual, Rainbow 0.0 to 100.0  
Default value  
Dual  
100.0  
CBGD1 Wave Parameter  
Setting range  
Pattern  
Sine, Saw  
Sine  
Cycle  
Phase  
Angle  
0 to 100  
0
ꢀ180.0 to 180.0 0.0 to 360.0  
Default value  
0.0  
0.0  
CBGD1 Move Parameter  
Setting range  
Move  
Speed  
ꢀ50.0 to 50.0  
Off, Roll,  
Rotation  
Default value  
Off  
1.0  
CBGD2 Main  
Parameter  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
100.0  
100.0  
Red  
CBGD2 Sub  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
CBGD2 Wash Parameter  
Setting range  
Wash  
On, Off  
Off  
Color  
R-Sat  
R-Lum  
0.0 to 108.0  
100.0  
Dual, Rainbow 0.0 to 100.0  
Default value  
Dual  
100.0  
CBGD2 Wave Parameter  
Setting range  
Pattern  
Sine, Saw  
Sine  
Cycle  
Phase  
Angle  
0 to 100  
0
ꢀ180.0 to 180.0 0.0 to 360.0  
0.0 0.0  
Default value  
CBGD2 Move Parameter  
Setting range  
Move  
Speed  
ꢀ50.0 to 50.0  
Off, Roll,  
Rotation  
Default value  
Off  
1.0  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Key  
Key  
Parameter  
Type  
Lum Key  
Fill  
PVW  
Setting range  
Lum, Linear,  
Chroma, Full  
Chroma On,  
Chroma Off  
Bus, Matte  
Auto, Off, On  
Default value  
Parameter  
Linear  
Chroma Off  
Gain  
Bus  
Auto  
Adjust  
Clip  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
Invert  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
Fill Matte  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
Edge1  
Edge2  
Type  
Width  
0 to 4  
Direction  
Density  
Setting range  
Off, Border,  
Drop, Shadow,  
Outline  
0, 45, 90, 135, 25, 50, 75,  
180, 225, 270, 100%  
315  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
2
0
100%  
Edge Fill  
Setting range  
Color,  
CBGD1,  
CBGD2,  
Still1, Still2,  
Clip1, Clip2  
Default value  
Parameter  
Color  
Edge Color  
Transition  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
Black  
Keyout Pattern  
Setting range  
Normal,  
Reverse  
Default value  
Normal  
WIPE Position Parameter  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Copy To BKGD  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
ꢀ100.00 to  
Execute  
100.00  
100.00  
Default value  
0.00  
0.00  
SQ Position  
Flying Key  
3D Modify  
Parameter  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Copy To BKGD  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
Execute  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Size  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
0.0 to 400.0  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
100.0  
Light  
On, Off  
Off  
Size  
Radius  
Angle  
Setting range  
Default value  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
0.000 to 1.000 ꢀ45 to +45  
0.500  
0
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Key  
Mask  
Parameter  
Mask  
Invert  
Setting range  
Off, Manual,  
4:3  
On, Off  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Off  
Mask Adjust  
Key Priority  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00  
ꢀ25.00  
25.00  
ꢀ25.00  
25.00  
Low  
Middle  
High  
Setting range  
Key, PinP1,  
PinP2  
Key, PinP1,  
PinP2  
Key, PinP1,  
PinP2  
Default value  
Key  
PinP1  
PinP2  
Chroma Key  
Auto Compute Parameter  
Setting range  
Auto Compute  
Execute  
Reset  
Execute  
Default value  
Adjust  
Parameter  
Narrow  
Phase  
Setting range  
Off, 0.5, 1.0,  
1.5  
ꢀ4.0 to 4.0  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
0.0  
Sample  
View  
Mode  
Undo  
Setting range  
Composite,  
Matte,  
Proc.FG,  
FG  
Select BG Color,  
Clean BG Noise,  
Clean FG Noise,  
Spill Sponge,  
Spillꢀ, Spill+,  
Matteꢀ,  
Execute  
Matte+,  
Detailꢀ, Detail+,  
Matte Sponge,  
Make FG Trans,  
Restore Detail,  
FineTuning  
Default value  
Parameter  
Composite  
Select BG Color  
Fine Tuning  
Spill  
Trans  
Detail  
Setting range  
Default value  
ꢀ1000 to 1000 ꢀ1000 to 1000 ꢀ1000 to 1000  
0
0
0
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
PinP1  
PinP  
Parameter  
Shape  
Density  
PVW  
Setting range  
Square, Circle, 0.0 to 100.0  
Heart, Flower,  
On, Off  
Star  
Default value  
Parameter  
Square  
Border  
Off, On  
Off  
100.0  
Off  
Border  
Width  
0.1 to 100.0  
5.0  
Soft  
Mode  
Fix, Variable  
Fix  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
Border Color  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
Position  
Trim  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Size  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
25.00  
Trim  
Manual  
Free, Pair  
Setting range  
Off, 4:3,  
Manual  
(Fixed to “Off”  
when a setting  
other than Square  
has been selected  
for the Shape item  
of the PinP sub  
menu)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Free  
Trim Adjust  
Sync  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00  
ꢀ40.00  
40.00  
ꢀ40.00  
40.00  
Symmetry  
Copy To PinP2  
Execute  
Synchronizes with Setting range  
the PinP2 menu  
Off, X, Y,  
Center  
settings.  
Default value  
Off  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
PinP2  
PinP  
Parameter  
Shape  
Density  
PVW  
Setting range  
Square, Circle, 0.0 to 100.0  
Heart, Flower,  
On, Off  
Star  
Default value  
Parameter  
Square  
Border  
Off, On  
Off  
100.0  
Off  
Border  
Width  
0.1 to 100.0  
5.0  
Soft  
Mode  
Fix, Variable  
Fix  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0  
Border Color  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
Position  
Trim  
X-Pos  
Y-Pos  
Size  
Setting range  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
ꢀ100.00 to  
100.00  
0.00 to 100.00  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.00  
0.00  
25.00  
Trim  
Manual  
Free, Pair  
Setting range  
Off, 4:3,  
Manual  
(Fixed to “Off”  
when a setting  
other than Square  
has been selected  
for the Shape item  
of the PinP sub  
menu)  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Free  
Trim Adjust  
Sync  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00  
ꢀ40.00  
40.00  
ꢀ40.00  
40.00  
Symmetry  
Copy To PinP1  
Execute  
Synchronizes with Setting range  
the PinP1 menu  
Off, X, Y,  
Center  
settings.  
Default value  
Off  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
DSK  
DSK  
Parameter  
Type  
Lum Key  
Fill  
PVW  
Setting range  
Lum, Linear  
Chroma On,  
Chroma Off  
Bus, Matte  
On, Off  
Default value  
Parameter  
Linear  
Chroma Off  
Gain  
Bus  
Off  
Adjust  
Clip  
Density  
0.0 to 100.0  
100.0  
Invert  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0 to 108.0  
0.0  
0.0 to 200.0  
100.0  
Fill Matte  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
100.0  
White  
Edge1  
Edge2  
Type  
Width  
0 to 4  
Direction  
Density  
Setting range  
Off, Border,  
Drop, Shadow,  
Outline  
0, 45, 90, 135, 25, 50, 75,  
180, 225, 270, 100%  
315  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
2
0
100%  
Edge Fill  
Setting range  
Color,  
CBGD1,  
CBGD2,  
Still1, Still2,  
Clip1, Clip2  
Default value  
Parameter  
Color  
Edge Color  
Hue  
Sat  
Lum  
Load ()  
Setting range  
0.0 to 359.9  
0.0 to 100.0  
0.0 to 108.0  
White, Yellow,  
Cyan, Green,  
Magenta, Red,  
Blue, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
0.0  
0.0  
0.0  
Black  
Mask  
Mask  
Invert  
On, Off  
Setting range  
Off, Manual,  
4:3  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Off  
Mask Adjust  
Left  
Top  
Bottom  
Right  
Setting range  
Default value  
ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00 ꢀ50.00 to 50.00  
ꢀ25.00  
25.00  
ꢀ25.00  
25.00  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Time  
BKGD  
Parameter  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
TransTime  
Sec  
Frame  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
0 to 999  
Default value  
Parameter  
1
0
Key  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
Parameter  
1
0
PinP1  
PinP2  
DSK  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
Parameter  
1
0
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
Parameter  
1
0
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
1
0
AUX1 BUS Trans Parameter  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Transition  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Enable, Disable  
Default value  
PinP1 BUS Trans Parameter  
Setting range  
1
0
Disable  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Transition  
Enable, Disable  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
PinP2 BUS Trans Parameter  
Setting range  
1
0
Disable  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Transition  
Enable, Disable  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
Effect Dissolve Parameter  
Setting range  
1
0
Disable  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
1
0
FTB  
Parameter  
Sec  
Frame  
0 to 999  
Setting range  
0 to 33  
(When 59.94 Hz  
is selected)  
Default value  
Parameter  
1
0
Plug-in  
The plug-in  
name of the  
plug-in software  
registered is  
displayed on the  
sub menu.  
Open Menu Enable  
Version  
Display only  
Delete  
Setting range  
Execute  
On, Off  
Execute  
Default value  
On  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Video Memory  
Video Memory1 Parameter  
Select  
Rec  
Play  
Stop  
Setting range  
Still1, Still2,  
Clip1, Clip2  
Execute  
Execute  
Execute  
Default value  
Video Memory2 Parameter  
Setting range  
Still1  
LEAD  
Execute  
LAST  
Execute  
Default value  
Video Memory3 Parameter  
Setting range  
Total Time  
Current time  
Key  
Rec Lock  
The setting range differs from one  
format to another.  
On, Off  
On, Off  
1080/59.94i:  
1080/50i:  
1080/24PsF:  
00s01f to 20s00f  
00s01f to 24s00f  
00s01f to 25s00f  
1080/23.98PsF: 00s01f to 25s00f  
720/59.94p:  
720/50p:  
480/59.94i:  
576/50i:  
00s01f to 10s00f  
00s01f to 12s00f  
00s01f to 20s00f  
00s01f to 24s00f  
Default value  
00s01f  
Preview  
On, Off  
Off  
00s01f  
Off  
On  
Rec1  
Rec2  
Parameter  
V Source  
AUX1 to 4  
AUX1  
Key Enable  
On, Off  
On  
Review  
On, Off  
On  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Loop  
Quality  
Limit (s)  
Limit (f)  
0 to 600  
Setting range  
On, Off  
High, Standard 0 to 20  
(When 59.94i is  
selected)  
Default value  
Off  
Standard  
20  
0
Clip1 Play Mode Parameter  
Mode  
Freeze  
Frame, Field  
Reverse  
Variable  
Setting range  
Lead, Last,  
Loop  
On, Off  
×1, ×2, ×4,  
×8, ×1/2,  
×1/4, ×1/8  
Default value  
Clip2 Play Mode Parameter  
Setting range  
Last  
Off  
×1  
Frame  
Mode  
Freeze  
Reverse  
Variable  
Lead, Last,  
Loop  
On, Off  
×1, ×2, ×4,  
×8, ×1/2,  
Frame, Field  
×1/4, ×1/8  
Default value  
Last  
Off  
×1  
Frame  
Parameter  
Clip1  
Clip2  
Trans Sync  
Setting range  
Off, KEY ON,  
PinP1 ON,  
PinP2 ON,  
DSK ON,  
Off, KEY ON,  
PinP1 ON,  
PinP2 ON,  
DSK ON,  
FTB ON  
FTB ON  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Off  
Mode  
Select  
Save  
Memory  
Setting range  
Auto, Manual  
Still1, Still2,  
Execute  
Clip1, Clip2, All  
Default value  
Auto  
All  
: This function can be actuated in any model whose system version is V2.00.00 and up.  
The functions are not displayed on the menus with a model whose system version is under V2.00.00.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
SD Card  
File1  
Parameter  
Save Type  
File Name  
Save  
Mode ()  
Setting range  
Load, Save, Init, Still1, Still2,  
Delete, No Card Clip1, Clip2,  
Shot, Event,  
Execute  
Set Up, All, Log  
Default value  
Parameter  
No Card  
All  
File2  
Sort  
Format  
Setting range  
Newest, Oldest, bmp, tga, png,  
Name  
jpg, tif, gif  
Default value  
Parameter  
Name  
bmp  
Card  
Free Space  
Information  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0 / 0  
Display only  
BKGD  
On, Off  
On  
Shot Memory  
Store Select  
Recall Select  
XPT Disable  
Register  
Key  
PinP1  
On, Off  
On  
PinP2  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On,Off  
On  
On, Off  
On  
BKGD  
On, Off  
On  
Key  
PinP1  
On, Off  
On  
PinP2  
On, Off  
On  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On,Off  
On  
BKGD  
On, Off  
Off  
Key  
PinP1  
On, Off  
Off  
PinP2  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On,Off  
Off  
Page  
No.  
Name  
CopyTo ()  
1 to 100  
1
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
1 to 10  
1
1 to 10  
1
Path  
Effect  
Cut, Dissolve  
PinP Bus  
Cut, Dissolve  
Hue Path  
Setting range  
Short, Long,  
CW, CCW  
Default value  
Parameter  
Dissolve  
Dissolve  
Short  
MEM PVW  
Mode  
Setting range  
MEM-PVW,  
PGM  
Default value  
PGM  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Event Memory  
Mark  
Parameter  
PAUSE  
CLIP  
Clip1, Clip2, Off GPI-O1 to  
GPI-O19, Off  
Off  
GPI-Out  
Setting range  
On, Off  
Default value  
Off  
Off  
Event Duration Parameter  
Setting range  
minute  
second  
frame  
Set  
Execute  
Default value  
0
0
0
Total Duration Parameter  
Setting range  
minute  
second  
frame  
Set  
Execute  
Default value  
0
0
0
Timeline  
Run  
Parameter  
View  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Normal, Wide  
Wide  
Run Mode  
Repeat, Loop  
Repeat  
BKGD  
On, Off  
On  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Store Select  
Recall Select  
XPT Disable  
Register  
Path  
Key  
PinP1  
On, Off  
On  
PinP2  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On,Off  
On  
On, Off  
On  
BKGD  
On, Off  
On  
Key  
PinP1  
On, Off  
On  
PinP2  
On, Off  
On  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On, Off  
On  
BKGD  
On, Off  
Off  
Key  
PinP1  
On, Off  
Off  
PinP2  
On, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On,Off  
Off  
Page  
No.  
Name  
CopyTo ()  
1 to 100  
1
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
1 to 10  
1
1 to 10  
1
Effect  
Cut, Dissolve  
PinP Bus  
Cut, Dissolve  
Trans Path  
Hue Path  
Setting range  
Linear, Step  
Short, Long,  
CW, CCW, Step  
Default value  
Parameter  
Dissolve  
Dissolve  
Linear  
CW  
MEM PVW  
Mode  
Setting range  
MEM-PVW,  
PGM  
Default value  
PGM  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
XPT  
XPT Assign 1/6 Parameter  
XPT1Signal XPT2Signal XPT3Signal XPT4Signal  
Setting range  
SDI IN1 to 8, DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-B1, IN-B2, Black, CBGD1,  
CBGD2, CBAR, Still1V, Still1K, Still2V, Still2K, Clip1V, Clip1K,  
Clip2V, Clip2K, MEM-PVW, CLN, KeyOut, None  
Default value  
XPT Assign 2/6 Parameter  
Setting range  
Black  
SDI IN1  
SDI IN2  
SDI IN3  
XPT5Signal  
XPT6Signal  
XPT7Signal  
XPT8Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.  
Default value  
XPT Assign 3/6 Parameter  
Setting range  
SDI IN4  
SDI IN5  
SDI IN6  
SDI IN7  
XPT9Signal  
XPT10Signal  
XPT11Signal  
XPT12Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.  
Default value  
XPT Assign 4/6 Parameter  
Setting range  
SDI IN8  
DVI IN  
IN-A1  
None  
XPT13Signal  
XPT14Signal  
XPT15Signal  
XPT16Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.  
Default value  
XPT Assign 5/6 Parameter  
Setting range  
IN-A2  
IN-B1  
IN-B2  
CBAR  
XPT17Signal  
XPT18Signal  
XPT19Signal  
XPT20Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.  
Default value  
XPT Assign 6/6 Parameter  
Setting range  
CBGD1  
Still1V  
None  
None  
XPT21Signal  
XPT22Signal  
XPT23Signal  
XPT24Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the XPT Assign 1/6 sub menu.  
Default value  
KeyOut  
CLN  
None  
None  
XPT Setting  
XPT Switch  
Parameter  
Shift  
Shift-Lock  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off, Right, Left On, Off  
Right  
Off  
Timing  
Setting range  
Any, Field1,  
Field2  
Default value  
Any  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Multi View Display MV Split  
Parameter  
Split  
Setting range  
4Split,  
5-aSplit,  
5-bSplit,  
6-aSplit,  
6-bSplit,  
9Split,  
10-aSplit,  
10-bSplit,  
16Split  
Default value  
10-aSplit  
MV Pattern 1/4 Parameter  
Pos1Signal  
Pos2Signal  
Pos3Signal  
Pos4Signal  
Setting range  
SDI IN1 to 8, DVI IN, IN-A1, IN-A2, IN-B1, IN-B2, CBGD1, CBGD2,  
Still1V, Still1K, Still2V, Still2K, Clip1V, Clip1K, Clip2V, Clip2K, PGM,  
PVW, MEM-PVW, Key Out, AUX1 to 4, Clock  
Default value  
MV Pattern 2/4 Parameter  
Setting range  
PGM  
PVW  
SDI IN1  
SDI IN2  
Pos5Signal  
Pos6Signal  
Pos7Signal  
Pos8Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.  
Default value  
MV Pattern 3/4 Parameter  
Setting range  
SDI IN3  
SDI IN4  
SDI IN5  
SDI IN6  
Pos9Signal  
Pos10Signal  
Pos11Signal  
Pos12Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.  
Default value  
MV Pattern 4/4 Parameter  
Setting range  
SDI IN7  
SDI IN8  
DVI IN  
Still1V  
Pos13Signal  
Pos14Signal  
Pos15Signal  
Pos16Signal  
The setting range is the same as for the MV Pattern 1/4 sub menu.  
Default value  
Still2V  
Clip1V  
Clip2V  
Label  
AUX1  
MV Frame  
Parameter  
Frame  
Character  
Tally  
Setting range  
LUM0%,  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%,  
Off  
LUM0%,  
LUM25%,  
LUM50%,  
LUM75%,  
LUM100%,  
Off  
On, Off  
Red,  
Red+Green,  
Off  
Default value  
Parameter  
LUM75%  
Level Meter  
On, Off  
Off  
LUM75%  
Input Status  
On, Off  
On  
On  
Red+Green  
Marker Size  
80 to 100%  
95%  
Display  
Marker  
4:3, 16:9, Off  
Off  
Setting range  
Default value  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Input  
Input  
Parameter  
Select ()  
Setting range  
SDI IN1 to 8,  
DVI IN,  
IN-A1, IN-A2,  
IN-B1, IN-B2  
Default value  
Parameter  
SDI IN1  
Input (SDI)  
FS  
FS  
Mode  
Delay  
/ X ()  
Setting range  
On, Off  
Normal,  
0 to 8f  
(Only SDI IN7  
and SDI IN8 are  
involved here.)  
Dot by Dot,  
Up Convert,  
Auto  
(Only SDI IN5  
to SDI IN8 are  
covered by the  
“Up Convert” and  
“Auto” modes.)  
SDI IN1 to SDI IN8,  
IN A1, IN A2, IN B1  
or IN B2 is displayed  
in the X part.  
The material name  
(up to 10 characters)  
is displayed in the  
 part.  
Default value  
On  
SDI IN1 to  
SDI IN4:  
0f  
Normal  
SDI IN5 to  
SDI IN8:  
Auto  
Freeze  
On, Off  
Off  
Freeze  
Name  
Parameter  
Select  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame, Field  
Frame  
Type  
Name  
Setting range  
Default value  
Default, User  
Default  
Scale  
Up Converter1 Parameter  
Move Detect  
Sharp  
Size  
(SDI IN5 to  
Setting range  
Squeeze,  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
100 to 110  
SDI IN8, IN A1,  
IN A2, IN B1, and  
IN B2 only)  
Edge Crop,  
Letter Box  
Default value  
Squeeze  
3
3
100  
Up Converter2 Parameter  
Edge Crop Pos  
Limiter  
(SDI IN5 to  
Setting range  
Center, Right,  
Left  
Off, 108, 104,  
100  
(Only IN A1,  
IN A2, IN B1 and  
IN B2 are involved  
here.)  
SDI IN8, IN A1,  
IN A2, IN B1, and  
IN B2 only)  
Default value  
Center  
Off  
Video Process1 Parameter  
Setting range  
Video Process Y-Gain  
Pedestal  
ꢀ20.0 to 20.0  
0.0  
On, Off  
Off  
0.0 to 200.0  
Default value  
100.0  
Video Process2 Parameter  
Setting range  
C-Gain  
Hue  
Copy From ()  
0.0 to 200.0  
0.0 to 359.9  
SDI IN1 to  
SDI IN8  
Default value  
100.0  
0.0  
Default values  
vary depending  
on the selections  
of the Select  
items in the Input  
submenu.  
: When the Select item is SDI IN1: SDI IN2  
When the Select item is other than SDI IN1: SDI IN1  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Input (Analog)  
/ X ()  
FS  
Parameter  
FS  
Mode  
Setting range  
On, Off  
Normal,  
Dot by Dot,  
Up Convert  
IN A1, IN A2, IN B1  
or IN B2 is displayed  
in the X part.  
The material name  
(up to 10 characters)  
is displayed in the  
 part.  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
Normal  
Freeze  
On, Off  
Off  
Freeze  
Name  
Select  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame, Field  
Frame  
Type  
Name  
Setting range  
Default value  
Default, User  
Default  
Scale  
Up Converter1 Parameter  
Move Detect  
Sharp  
Size  
Setting range  
Squeeze,  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
100 to 110  
Edge Crop,  
Letter Box  
Default value  
Up Converter2 Parameter  
Setting range  
Squeeze  
3
3
100  
Edge Crop Pos  
Limiter  
Center, Right,  
Left  
Off, 108, 104,  
100  
Default value  
Video Process Parameter  
Setting range  
Center  
Gain  
Off  
ꢀ30 to 30  
0
Default value  
Input (DVI)  
Freeze  
Parameter  
Select  
Freeze  
On, Off  
Off  
/ X ()  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame, Field  
Frame  
DVI IN, IN A1, IN A2,  
IN B1 or IN B2 is  
displayed in the X  
part.  
The material name  
(up to 10 characters)  
is displayed in the  
 part.  
Name  
Type  
Name  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Default, User  
Default  
Mode  
DVI Input  
Scale  
Auto ()  
Setting range  
Digital, Analog Fit-V, Fit-H, Full  
(Enabled when  
Black, White  
(Enabled when  
the AV-HS04M3  
option board has  
the AV-HS04M3  
option board has  
been connected.)  
been connected.),  
Init  
Default value  
Parameter  
Digital  
Full  
Black  
DVI Phase  
Clk Phs  
ꢀ16 to 15  
H-Pos  
V-Pos  
(Enabled when  
the AV-HS04M3  
option board has  
been connected.)  
Setting range  
ꢀ100 to 100  
ꢀ100 to 100  
Default value  
Display only  
0
0
0
DVI Status  
Size  
Dot Clock  
.MHz  
H-Frequency  
.kHz  
V-Frequency  
x  
.Hz  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Input (Composite) FS  
Parameter  
FS  
Mode  
/ X ()  
Setting range  
On, Off  
Dot by Dot,  
Up Convert  
(Enabled when  
the system  
format is set to  
1080/59.94i,  
1080/24PsF,  
1080/23.98PsF  
and 720/59.94p.)  
IN A1, IN A2, IN B1  
or IN B2 is displayed  
in the X part.  
The material name  
(up to 10 characters)  
is displayed in the  
 part.  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
Up Convert  
Freeze  
On, Off  
Off  
Freeze  
Select  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Frame, Field  
Frame  
Name  
Type  
Name  
Setting range  
Default value  
Default, User  
Default  
Scale  
Up Converter1 Parameter  
Move Detect  
Sharp  
Size  
Setting range  
Squeeze,  
1 to 5  
1 to 5  
100 to 110  
Edge Crop,  
Letter Box  
Default value  
Up Converter2 Parameter  
Setting range  
Squeeze  
3
3
100  
Edge Crop Pos  
Limiter  
Center, Right,  
Left  
Off, 108, 104,  
100  
Default value  
Video Process Parameter  
Setting range  
Center  
Gain  
Off  
Chroma  
Ped  
Hue  
ꢀ30 to 30  
ꢀ8 to 7  
ꢀ100 to 100  
ꢀ30 to 30  
(Enabled when  
the system  
format is set to  
1080/59.94i,  
720/59.94p and  
480/59.94i.)  
Default value  
0
0
0
0
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Output  
Output  
Parameter  
SDI Limit  
Select ()  
Setting range  
SDI OUT1 to 5,  
DVI OUT,  
OUT-A1,  
Off, 108, 104,  
100  
OUT-A2,  
OUT-B1,  
OUT-B2  
Default value  
Parameter  
SDI OUT1  
Source  
Off  
Output (SDI)  
/ Y Assign  
Mode  
Setting range  
PGM, PVW,  
CLN, AUX1 to 4, Down Convert  
MV, KeyOut,  
MEM-PVW  
Normal,  
SDI OUT1 to SDI OUT5,  
OUT A1, OUT A2,  
(“Down Convert”  
takes effect when  
AV-HS04M7 is  
connected.)  
OUT B1 or OUT B2 is  
displayed in the Y part.  
(OUT A1, OUT A2,  
OUT B1 and OUT B2  
take effect when the  
AV-HS04M7 board has  
been connected.)  
Default value  
PGM(OUT1),  
PVW(OUT2),  
Normal  
AUX1(OUT3),  
AUX2(OUT4),  
AUX3(OUT5),  
AUX1(OUTA1),  
AUX2(OUTA2),  
AUX3(OUTB1),  
AUX4(OUTB2)  
Down  
Parameter  
Scale  
Delay  
Sharp  
Converter  
(Enabled when  
the AV-HS04M7  
option board has  
been connected.)  
Setting range  
Squeeze,  
Edge Crop,  
Letter Box  
90H(75H), 1F  
1 to 5  
Default value  
Parameter  
Squeeze  
90H(75H)  
3
Output (Analog) / Y Assign  
Source  
Setting range  
PGM, PVW,  
OUT A1, OUT A2,  
CLN, AUX1 to 4,  
MV, Key Out,  
MEM-PVW  
OUT B1 or OUT B2 is  
displayed in the Y part.  
(OUT A1, OUT A2,  
OUT B1 and OUT B2  
take effect when the  
AV-HS04M4 board has  
been connected.  
OUT A2 and OUT B2  
take effect when the  
AV-HS04M5 board has  
been connected.)  
Default value  
AUX1(OUTA1),  
AUX2(OUTA2),  
AUX3(OUTB1),  
AUX4(OUTB2)  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Output (DVI-D)  
/ DVI OUT  
Assign  
Parameter  
Source  
Move Detect  
Setting range  
PGM, PVW,  
1 to 5  
CLN, AUX1 to 4,  
MV, Key Out,  
MEM-PVW  
Default value  
Parameter  
MV  
3
DVI Output  
Scale  
Size ()  
Auto, XGA,  
Setting range  
Fit-V, Fit-H,  
WXGA, SXGA, Full, Fullx80%,  
WSXGA+,  
UXGA,  
Fullx90%  
WUXGA,  
1080/59.94i,  
1080/59.94p,  
720/59.94p,  
720/50p,  
1080/50p,  
1080/50i  
Default value  
Parameter  
Auto  
Full  
Output (DVI-I) / Y Assign  
Source  
Move Detect  
1 to 5  
Setting range  
PGM, PVW,  
OUT A1 or OUT B1 is  
displayed in the Y part.  
(It takes effect when the  
AV-HS04M5 board has  
been connected.)  
CLN, AUX1 to 4,  
MV, Key Out,  
MEM-PVW  
Default value  
AUX1(OUTA1), 3  
AUX3(OUTB1)  
DVI Output  
Parameter  
Mode  
Size  
Scale  
Setting range  
Digital, Analog  
Fit-V, Fit-H,  
Full, Fullx80%,  
Fullx90%  
Analog   
Auto, XGA,  
WXGA, SXGA  
Digital   
Auto, XGA,  
WXGA, SXGA,  
WSXGA+,  
UXGA, WUXGA  
Default value  
Digital  
Auto  
Full  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Config  
Operate  
Parameter  
Bus Mode  
Key Link  
Time Unit  
Delegation  
Setting range  
A/B,  
Off, DSK,  
Sec, Frame  
On, Off  
PGM-A/PST-B, PinP1, PinP2,  
PGM-B/PST-A  
PGM-A/PST-B  
FTB Source  
PinP1/2  
Default value  
Parameter  
Off  
Sec  
On  
Assign  
CLN  
Setting range  
Still1, Still2,  
Clip1, Clip2,  
CBGD1,  
Key, DSK  
CBGD2,  
White, Black  
Default value  
Parameter  
Black  
Key  
Latency  
LCD BL  
BKGD  
Key  
Setting range  
1F Fix,  
Minimum  
1F Fix,  
Minimum  
Default value  
Parameter  
Minimum  
Minimum  
Adjust  
Light ()  
Setting range  
On, Off, 60,  
120, 180  
80 to 150%  
Default value  
Parameter  
On  
100%  
Button  
Illumination  
Adjust  
Illumination  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On, Off  
On  
80 to 150%  
100%  
WFM  
Style  
Mode  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
Parade, Overlay YPbPr, RGB, Y  
Parade  
YPbPr  
Vector  
Bar Target  
75%, 100%  
100%  
Setting range  
Default value  
User Button1 Parameter  
User1  
User2  
User3  
User4  
Setting range  
KEY PVW, PinP PVW, PinP1PVW, PinP2PVW, DSK PVW, GPII-EN,  
GPIO-EN, SHIFT, AUX Trans, PinP Trans, EFF DSLV, None  
Default value  
User Button2 Parameter  
Setting range  
KEY PVW  
PinP PVW  
DSK PVW  
PinP Trans  
User5  
User6  
User7  
User8  
The setting range is the same as for the User Button1 sub menu.  
Default value  
AUX Trans  
EFF DSLV  
SHIFT  
None  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
Config  
GPI-In Setting Parameter  
Setting range  
GPI-In Enable AUX Sel  
On, Off  
On  
AUX1 to  
4
Default value  
AUX1  
GPI-In Port 1/2 Parameter  
Setting range  
Port1Assign  
Port2Assign  
Port3Assign  
Port4Assign  
AUTO, CUT, KEY ON, DSK ON, PinP1 ON, PinP2 ON, FTB,  
BKGD AUTO, BKGD CUT, KEY AUTO, KEY CUT, REC Still1,  
REC Still2, REC Clip1, PLAY Clip1, STOP Clip1, REC Clip2,  
PLAY Clip2, STOP Clip2, AUX XPT1 to 24, RED Tly DSBL,  
GRN Tly DSBL, AUX Tly DSBL, No Assign  
Default value  
GPI-In Port 2/2 Parameter  
Setting range  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
Port5Assign  
Port6Assign  
Port7Assign  
Port8Assign  
The setting range is the same as for the GPI-In Port 1/2 sub menu.  
Default value  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
GPI-Out  
Setting  
Parameter  
GPI-Out Enable AUX Tly Sel  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On, Off  
On  
AUX1 to  
4
AUX1  
GPI-Out Port  
1/5  
Port1Assign  
Port2Assign  
Port3Assign  
Port4Assign  
Setting range  
AUTO, CUT, KEY ON, DSK ON, PinP1 ON, PinP2 ON, FTB ON,  
BKGD AUTO, BKGD CUT, KEY AUTO, KEY CUT, KEY Trans,  
DSK Trans, PinP1Trans, PinP2Trans, FTB Trans, RED Tly1 to 13,  
GRN Tly1 to 13, AUX Tly1 to 13, Event MEM, No Assign  
Default value  
Parameter  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
GPI-Out Port  
2/5  
Port5Assign  
Port6Assign  
Port7Assign  
Port8Assign  
Setting range  
The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port 1/5 sub menu.  
Default value  
Parameter  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
GPI-Out Port  
3/5  
Port9Assign  
Port10Assign Port11Assign Port12Assign  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port 1/5 sub menu.  
No Assign No Assign No Assign No Assign  
GPI-Out Port  
4/5  
Port13Assign Port14Assign Port15Assign Port16Assign  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port 1/5 sub menu.  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
No Assign  
GPI-Out Port  
5/5  
Port17Assign Port18Assign Port19Assign  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
The setting range is the same as for the GPI-Out Port 1/5 sub menu.  
No Assign  
Mode ()  
1 to 3  
No Assign  
No Assign  
COM-Port  
Setting range  
Default value  
1
System Menu Parameter  
Setting range  
Lock  
On, Off  
Off  
Default value  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
System  
/Locked (Message)  
Display only  
System menu is locked  
(When locked)  
System /Unlocked Format  
Parameter  
Hi Resolution 16:9 Squeeze  
Format ()  
Setting range  
1080/59.94i,  
1080/50i,  
1080/24PsF,  
1080/23.98PsF,  
720/59.94p,  
720/50p,  
On, Off  
(Selection  
enabled when SD enabled when SD  
format is used)  
On, Off  
(Selection  
(When unlocked)  
format is used)  
480/59.94i,  
576/50i  
Default value  
1080/59.94i  
System  
Off  
Off  
Output Phase Parameter  
H-Phase  
V-Phase  
Setting range  
0H, 1H  
The setting range ꢀ100 to 100  
differs from one  
format to another.  
1080/59.94i:  
ꢀ1100 to 1099  
1080/50i:  
ꢀ1320 to 1319  
1080/24PsF:  
ꢀ1375 to 1374  
1080/23.98PsF:  
ꢀ1375 to 1374  
720/59.94p:  
ꢀ825 to 824  
720/50p:  
ꢀ990 to 989  
480/59.94i:  
ꢀ429 to 428  
576/50i:  
ꢀ432 to 431  
Default value  
0H  
0
0
Reference  
Ancillary  
Parameter  
BB Setup  
0IRE, 7.5IRE  
Gen Lock  
Sync ()  
Setting range  
BB,  
Locked, UnLock  
BB Advanced,  
Tri-level sync,  
Internal  
Default value  
Parameter  
BB  
7.5IRE  
PGM  
On, Off  
Off  
UnLock  
PVW  
AUX  
On, Off  
Off  
MV  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
On, Off  
Off  
PGM, PVW, Off  
Off  
Alarm  
Initial  
Power  
Fan  
Temperature  
Display only  
Alarm,  
No Alarm  
Alarm,  
No Alarm  
Alarm,  
No Alarm  
Parameter  
Fader Initial  
Initial ()  
Setting range  
Mode A,  
Mode B  
Execute  
Default value  
Mode A  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Setting menu table  
Sub menu  
Menu  
Parameter 1  
Parameter 2  
Parameter 3  
Parameter 4  
Use [F1] to select.  
Use [F2] to select. Use [F3] to select. Use [F4] to select. Use [F5] to select.  
System /Unlocked Network1  
Parameter  
IP Address  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
0 to 255  
(When unlocked)  
192.168.0.8  
Subnet Mask  
0 to 255  
Network2  
Network3  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
255.255.255.0  
Default Gateway  
0 to 255  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
192.168.0.1  
MAC Address  
Display only  
Network4  
Date  
Display only  
Parameter  
Year  
Month  
1 to 12  
Date  
1 to 31  
Set  
Setting range  
Default value  
Parameter  
2011 to 2035  
Execute  
Time  
Hour  
0 to 23  
Minute  
0 to 59  
Second  
0 to 59  
Set  
Setting range  
Default value  
Execute  
Main Version Parameter  
System Version Module Type  
Select  
Version  
Version number  
Setting range  
Version number  
Soft, FPGA  
Soft   
Main1, Main2,  
BKGD, KEY,  
PinP, DSK,  
TIME, Plugin,  
VMEM,  
Memory,  
XPT/MV,  
Input, Output,  
Config, System,  
BKGDPat,  
XPTStat,  
HsifLibrary  
FPGA   
Main1, Main2,  
SDI, DVI,  
Control, Panel  
Default value  
Option Version Parameter  
Setting range  
Soft  
Main1  
Select  
Board  
Version  
SLOT A, SLOT B SDI-IN, Ana-IN, Version number  
DVI-IN, DVID-IN,  
SDI-OUT,  
Ana-OUT,  
D/A-OUT,  
Csit-IN,  
None  
Default value  
SLOT A  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix (glossary)  
Defined below are the terms used in this manual.  
Word  
Explanation  
AB Bus system  
A bus control mode. By executing a transition, the A bus and B bus signals are output to  
the program images alternately.  
Ancillary Data  
The auxiliary data other than the video signals which is transmitted inside the data  
stream of the video serial interface. The data superimposed on the vertical blanking  
period is referred to as the V ancillary data (VANC).  
Aspect ratio  
The ratio between the horizontal and vertical dimensions of an image or screen.  
It is 16:9 for the HD format and 4:3 for the SD format.  
AUX  
A spare bus which can be switched by signals other than the main line output signals.  
[Auxiliary Bus]  
AVDL  
A function to automatically adjust the input image signal phase to the horizontal  
synchronization reference signal phase.  
[Automatic Video Delayline]  
BB  
The black burst signal. A full-screen black level composite signal which is used as the  
reference signal for gen-lock.  
[Black burst]  
Border  
The area or margin that is added to the edge of a wipe or key.  
Its width and color can be adjusted. The defocusing of the area around a border is  
referred to as the soft effect.  
Chroma key  
This refers to the function for creating the key signals based on the color information of  
the video signals and combining the keys.  
Clip  
The threshold level of the luminance when key signals are created from a key source.  
Color Background  
The signals which are output from the internal color generator and used as the  
background image.  
Cut  
This refers to the effect where the display is instantly switched to the next image.  
A parameter which is used to adjust the density of the key signals.  
Density  
Dot by Dot  
This treats images as actual size (1) images. With PinP, it allows SD images to be  
combined with HD images with no accompanying deterioration in the images themselves.  
Down Converter  
This is the function that converts material in the HD format into the SD format.  
DSK [Downstream Key]  
This refers to the key combination process which is performed at the end of the mix  
effect. The key is always combined with the foremost image.  
DVE [Digital Video Effect]  
This refers to the transition patterns accompanying size reductions or slide effects.  
DVI  
A digital video interface standard.  
[Digital Visual Interface]  
DVI-I can handle both digital signals and analog signals.  
Embedded Audio  
This refers to the audio data packets which are transferred inside the data stream of the  
video serial interface.  
Flip Flop system  
(PGM/PST system)  
A bus control mode. The signals selected by the program bus are always output as the  
program images. By executing a transition, the program bus and preset bus signals are  
switched over.  
Flying Key  
This function uses DVE effects to move, expand or reduce key signals.  
Frame Synchronizer  
Freeze  
A function which matches the synchronization of non-synchronized video input signals.  
A function which continues the display of the same image, creating the impression that  
the image has been “frozen”.  
FTB [Fade to Black]  
Genlock  
This is the effect where the background image is faded out to the black screen.  
A function for synchronizing the video signals using an external sync signal as the  
reference.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix (glossary)  
Word  
Explanation  
GPI  
Interface signals which control auto transition from an external source.  
[General Purpose Interface]  
Hue  
IRE  
The color tone of the video signals.  
A unit used for video signal levels.  
The setup level (black level) of the signals is expressed as 0 IRE, 7.5 IRE, etc.  
Key Edge  
Key Fill  
The border or shadow added to the edges of keys.  
The signal that uses key combination processing to fill in the areas left blank by the key  
signals.  
Key Gain  
Key Invert  
Key Mask  
A parameter which is used to adjust the amplitude of the key signals.  
A function which inverts the key signals.  
This is the function that specifies the area for key combination using the box pattern, etc.  
When only part of the area of the key signals is used, key combination is executed with  
the unnecessary area masked.  
Key Source  
Linear Key  
The video signals for creating the key signals.  
The function which combines keys using monochrome key signals with gradations in its  
outlines as a reference.  
Lum  
The brightness portion of the video signals.  
[Luminance]  
Luminance Key  
The function which creates key signals based on the luminance (brightness) information  
of the video signals to combine keys.  
ME  
[Mix Effect]  
A video effect device which combines a number of video signals to create mix, wipe, key  
and other video signals.  
Mix  
The picture-changing effect produced by overlapping one image with the next.  
It is also referred to as “dissolve”.  
Multi View Display  
OSD [On Screen Display]  
PinP [Picture in Picture]  
This function combines multiple materials and displays them on one screen. PGM, PVW  
and the input material can be previewed at the same time on a single screen.  
This function enables settings to be performed on the menu screens which are displayed  
in the monitor output.  
This function combines a sub screen image with the background image.  
PVW  
[Preview]  
The function for checking ahead of time the image which will be output after the next  
transition. The image is output from the PVW system.  
PGM  
The bus which always carries the program output signals.  
[Program Bus]  
PST  
The bus which carries the program output signals after the next background transition.  
[Preset Bus]  
RS-422  
A serial interface standard. It is the interface used to control the switcher from an editor  
or other external device.  
Sat  
This refers to the intensity of the color chrominance level of video signals.  
[Saturation]  
SDI  
The standard by which video signals in various SD and HD formats are transmitted along  
a single coaxial cable.  
[Serial Digital Interface]  
Self Key  
A function that creates key signals from key fill signals for combining keys.  
Setup Data  
The memory in which the control panel statuses can be saved and recalled.  
The button selection statuses as well as the border, color and other setting information  
can be saved in this memory.  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix (glossary)  
Word  
Explanation  
Tally  
The signal which outputs the program output statuses of the input signals to an external  
device. The LED that indicates the program output status on the control panel is also  
referred to as tally.  
Transition  
A function that switches from one image to another.  
Wipe, mix and other effects are available for the images during switching.  
Tri-level Sync  
Trimming  
The sync signal used for HD formats.  
This is the function that eliminates the unnecessary parts at the top, bottom, left and/or  
right of the images which are combined using the PinP function.  
Up Converter  
Video Memory  
Wipe  
This is the function that converts material in the SD format into the HD format which  
yields a high resolution.  
This is the memory in which the images (still images and moving images) with key  
signals can be stored.  
A video effect in which one image is gradually replaced by another as the boundary  
between the two is moved using a preselected pattern.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
B
D
M Background ............................................. 117  
M DSK .......................................................... 123  
3D Modify ........................................................... 117  
Border ................................................................. 117  
Border Color ....................................................... 117  
Modify ................................................................. 117  
SQ Position ......................................................... 117  
WIPE Position ..................................................... 117  
Adjust ................................................................. 123  
DSK .................................................................... 123  
Edge1 ................................................................. 123  
Edge2 ................................................................. 123  
Edge Color ......................................................... 123  
Fill Matt ............................................................... 123  
Mask ................................................................... 123  
Mask Adjust ........................................................ 123  
C
M Chroma Key ............................................. 120  
E
Adjust ................................................................. 120  
Auto Compute ..................................................... 120  
FineTuning .......................................................... 120  
Sample ............................................................... 120  
M Event Memory ......................................... 127  
Event Duration .................................................... 127  
Mark ................................................................... 127  
MEM PVW .......................................................... 127  
Path .................................................................... 127  
Recall Select ...................................................... 127  
Register .............................................................. 127  
Run ..................................................................... 127  
Store Select ........................................................ 127  
Timeline .............................................................. 127  
Total Duration ..................................................... 127  
XPT Disable ........................................................ 127  
M Color Background ................................... 118  
CBGD1 Main ...................................................... 118  
CBGD1 Move ..................................................... 118  
CBGD1 Sub ........................................................ 118  
CBGD1 Wash ..................................................... 118  
CBGD1 Wave ..................................................... 118  
CBGD2 Main ...................................................... 118  
CBGD2 Move ..................................................... 118  
CBGD2 Sub ........................................................ 118  
CBGD2 Wash ..................................................... 118  
CBGD2 Wave ..................................................... 118  
I
M Input ......................................................... 130  
M Config ...................................................... 135  
Input ................................................................... 130  
Assign ................................................................. 135  
Button Illumination .............................................. 135  
COM-Port ........................................................... 136  
GPI-In Port 1/5 .................................................... 136  
GPI-In Port 2/5 .................................................... 136  
GPI-In Setting ..................................................... 136  
GPI-Out Port 1/2 ................................................. 136  
GPI-Out Port 2/2 ................................................. 136  
GPI-Out Port 3/5 ................................................. 136  
GPI-Out Port 4/5 ................................................. 136  
GPI-Out Port 5/5 ................................................. 136  
GPI-Out Setting .................................................. 136  
Latency ............................................................... 135  
LCD BL ............................................................... 135  
Operate .............................................................. 135  
System Menu ...................................................... 136  
User Button1 ...................................................... 135  
User Button2 ...................................................... 135  
Vector ................................................................. 135  
WFM ................................................................... 135  
M Input (Analog) ......................................... 131  
Freeze ................................................................ 131  
FS ....................................................................... 131  
Name .................................................................. 131  
Up Converter1 .................................................... 131  
Up Converter2 .................................................... 131  
Video Process .................................................... 131  
M Input (Composite) ................................... 132  
Freeze ................................................................ 132  
FS ....................................................................... 132  
Name .................................................................. 132  
Up Converter1 .................................................... 132  
Up Converter2 .................................................... 132  
Video Process .................................................... 132  
M Input (DVI) ................................................ 131  
DVI Input ............................................................. 131  
DVI Phase ........................................................... 131  
DVI Status ........................................................... 131  
Freeze ................................................................ 131  
Name .................................................................. 131  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
M Input (SDI) ................................................ 130  
P
Freeze ................................................................ 130  
FS ....................................................................... 130  
Name .................................................................. 130  
Up Converter1 .................................................... 130  
Up Converter2 .................................................... 130  
Video Process1 .................................................. 130  
Video Process2 .................................................. 130  
M PinP1 ........................................................ 121  
Border ................................................................. 121  
Border Color ....................................................... 121  
PinP .................................................................... 121  
Position ............................................................... 121  
Sync ................................................................... 121  
Trim ..................................................................... 121  
Trim Adjust .......................................................... 121  
K
M PinP2 ........................................................ 122  
M Key ........................................................... 119  
Border ................................................................. 122  
Border Color ....................................................... 122  
PinP .................................................................... 122  
Position ............................................................... 122  
Sync ................................................................... 122  
Trim ..................................................................... 122  
Trim Adjust .......................................................... 122  
3D Modify ........................................................... 119  
Adjust ................................................................. 119  
Edge1 ................................................................. 119  
Edge2 ................................................................. 119  
Edge Color ......................................................... 119  
Fill Matte ............................................................. 119  
Flying Key ........................................................... 119  
Key ..................................................................... 119  
Key Priority ......................................................... 120  
Mask ................................................................... 120  
Mask Adjust ........................................................ 120  
SQ Position ......................................................... 119  
Transition ............................................................ 119  
WIPE Position ..................................................... 119  
M Plug-in ...................................................... 124  
S
M SD Card .................................................... 126  
Card Information ................................................. 126  
File1 .................................................................... 126  
File2 .................................................................... 126  
M
M Shot Memory ........................................... 126  
M Multi View Display ................................... 129  
MEM PVW .......................................................... 126  
Path .................................................................... 126  
Recall Select ...................................................... 126  
Register .............................................................. 126  
Store Select ........................................................ 126  
XPT Disable ........................................................ 126  
Display ................................................................ 129  
MV Frame ........................................................... 129  
MV Pattern 1/4 .................................................... 129  
MV Pattern 2/4 .................................................... 129  
MV Pattern 3/4 .................................................... 129  
MV Pattern 4/4 .................................................... 129  
MV Split .............................................................. 129  
M System ..................................................... 137  
Alarm .................................................................. 137  
Ancillary .............................................................. 137  
Date .................................................................... 138  
Format ................................................................ 137  
Initial ................................................................... 137  
Main Version ....................................................... 138  
Network1 ............................................................ 138  
Network2 ............................................................ 138  
Network3 ............................................................ 138  
Network4 ............................................................ 138  
Option Version .................................................... 138  
Output Phase ..................................................... 137  
Reference ........................................................... 137  
Time ................................................................... 138  
O
M Output ...................................................... 133  
Output ................................................................. 133  
M Output (Analog) ...................................... 133  
Assign ................................................................. 133  
M Output (DVI-D) ......................................... 134  
Assign ................................................................. 134  
DVI Output .......................................................... 134  
M Output (DVI-I) ........................................... 134  
Assign ................................................................. 134  
DVI Output .......................................................... 134  
M Output (SDI) ............................................. 133  
Assign ................................................................. 133  
Down Converter .................................................. 133  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
T
M Time ......................................................... 124  
AUX1 BUS Trans ................................................ 124  
BKGD ................................................................. 124  
DSK .................................................................... 124  
Effect Dissolve .................................................... 124  
FTB ..................................................................... 124  
Key ..................................................................... 124  
PinP1 .................................................................. 124  
PinP1 BUS Trans ................................................ 124  
PinP2 .................................................................. 124  
PinP2 BUS Trans ................................................ 124  
V
M Video Memory ......................................... 125  
Clip1 Play Mode ................................................. 125  
Clip2 Play Mode ................................................. 125  
Memory .............................................................. 125  
Rec1 ................................................................... 125  
Rec2 ................................................................... 125  
Trans Sync .......................................................... 125  
Video Memory1 .................................................. 125  
Video Memory2 .................................................. 125  
Video Memory3 .................................................. 125  
X
M XPT ........................................................... 128  
XPT Assign 1/6 ................................................... 128  
XPT Assign 2/6 ................................................... 128  
XPT Assign 3/6 ................................................... 128  
XPT Assign 4/6 ................................................... 128  
XPT Assign 5/6 ................................................... 128  
XPT Assign 6/6 ................................................... 128  
XPT Setting ........................................................ 128  
XPT Switch ......................................................... 128  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2011  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Miele Oven H868 User Manual
Miele Refrigerator K 12010 S 2 User Manual
Nady Systems Microphone U 33B User Manual
NEC Digital Photo Frame IS010 12E User Manual
NEC Projector NP VE281 User Manual
Nikon Scanner SF 200 User Manual
NuTone Vacuum Cleaner AB0008 User Manual
Oki Printer 16n User Manual
Panasonic Telephone KX PW16CL User Manual
Paradox Hellas SA Network Card CAA470A EI02 User Manual